Donate
   
Select your preferred input and type any Sanskrit or English word. Enclose the word in “” for an EXACT match e.g. “yoga”.
Amarakosha Search
Results for sin
WordReferenceGenderNumberSynonymsDefinition
dhamanīFeminineSingularhanuḥ, haṭṭavilāsinī, añjanakeśī
nalinīFeminineSingularbisinī, padminīan assemblage of lotus flowers
saindhavaḥ2.9.42MasculineSingularmaṇimantham, sindhujam, śītaśivam
saṃbhedaḥMasculineSingularsindhusaṅgamaḥthe mouth of a river
samudraḥ1.10.1MasculineSingularsāgaraḥ, udadhiḥ, pārāvāraḥ, apāṃpatiḥ, ratnākaraḥ, sarasvān, udanvān, akūpāraḥ, yādaḥpatiḥ, arṇavaḥ, sindhuḥ, saritpatiḥ, abdhiḥ, jalanidhiḥthe sea or ocean
sindhuḥ3.3.108MasculineSingularmaryādā, pratijñā
sindukaḥ2.2.68MasculineSingularindrāṇikā, sinduvāraḥ, indrasurasaḥ, nirguṇḍī
sindūram2.9.106NeuterSingularvapram, ‍nāgam, yogeṣṭam
sinīvālīFeminineSingularno moon
Monier-Williams Search
Results for sin
Devanagari
BrahmiEXPERIMENTAL
सिनmfn. (for 2.See sub voce, i.e. the word in the Sanskrit order) stuck fist (as food in the throat) on Va1rtt. 4 View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिनm. a bond, fetter View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिनn. (according to to some fr. a -= in;fr. which also sinva-, sinvat-in a-s-;for 1. sina-See) provision, store (according to to equals anna-,"food"; according to to others "reward, pay") View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिनm. (only ) the body View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिनm. a garment View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिनm. Careya Arborea View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिनm. mt (ī-)n. white (= 3. sita-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिनm. blind, one eyed (equals kāṇa-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिनवत्(sina--) mfn. abundant, copious View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धSee k/us-, . View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धिn. (perhaps connected with next) rock-salt View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुm. and f. (prob. fr.1. sidh-,"to go") a river, stream (especially the indu-s, and in this sense said to be the only river regarded as m.See -nada-, column 2) etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुm. flood, waters (also in the sky) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुm. ocean, sea etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुm. a symbolical term for the number 4 (see 1. samudra-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुm. Name of varuṇa- (as god of the ocean) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुm. the moisture of the lips View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुm. water ejected from an elephant's trunk (equals vamathu-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुm. the exudation from an elephant's temples View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुm. the country around the indu-s (commonly called Sindh; plural"the inhabitants of Sindh") etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुm. a king of Sindh (?) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुm. Name of viṣṇu- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुm. white or refined borax (equals śveta-ṭaṅkaṇa-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुm. equals sindhuka- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुm. (in music) a particular rāga-, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुm. Name of a king of the gandharva-s
सिन्धुm. of a serpent-demon View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुm. of various men View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुडा(?) f. Name of a rāgiṇī- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुदत्तm. Name of a man View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धूद्भव() () n. rock-salt. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुदेशm. the country of Sindh View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धूधूपल() n. rock-salt. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुद्वीपm. Name of a king View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुद्वीपm. of the author of the hymn (having the patronymic ambarīṣa-.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुद्वीपm. of other men View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुगञ्जm. a treasury built by sindhu- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुजmfn. ocean-born, river-born, aquatic View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुजmfn. born or produced in the country Sindh View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुजाf. Name of lakṣmī- (as produced at the churning of the ocean) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुजn. rock-salt View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुजन्मन्mfn. ocean-born View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुजन्मन्mfn. produced in Sindh View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुजन्मन्m. the moon View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुजन्मन्n. rock-salt View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुकmfn. marine View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुकmfn. born or produced in Sindh View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुकm. Vitex Negundo View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुकm. Name of a king View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुकन्याf. "daughter of the ocean", Name of lakṣmi- (also kṣīroda-sindhu-k-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुकफm. "sea-foam", cuttle-fish bone View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुकरn. a kind of borax (prob. incorrect) . View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुकारिका wrong reading for -vārikā- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुखेलm. "played or flowed over by the indu-s", the country Sindh View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुक्षित्m. Name of a rājarṣi- (author of the hymn and having the patronymic praiyamedha-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुलm. Name of the father of bhoja- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुलवणn. rock-salt View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुमध्यName of a district View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुमन्थm. the churning of the ocean View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुमन्थm. "ocean churning-stick", a mountain (according to to some) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुमन्थजn. rock-salt View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुमथ्यmfn. produced at the churning of the ocean View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुमातृf. (s/indhu--) the mother of streams (said of the river sarasvatī-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुमातृmfn. having the sea as mother View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुमित्रm. Name of a man gaRa kāśyādi-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुमुखn. the mouth of a river View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुमुखागतmfn. arrived at the mouth of a river View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुनदm. the river indu-s View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुनदm. Name of a southern river View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुनदm. of a country View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुनन्दनm. "son of the ocean", the moon (one of the 14 precious things recovered by churning the ocean after the flood) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुनाथm. "lord of rivers", the ocean View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुपारजmfn. born or produced on the indu-s (said of a horse) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुपर्णीf. Gmelina Arborea View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुपथm. gaRa deva-pathādi-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुपतिm. lord of the flood View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुपतिm. "lord of Sindh", Name of jayad-ratha- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुपत्नी(s/indhu--) f. having the sindhu- for mistress View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुपिबm. Name of agastya- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुप्रसूतn. rock-salt View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुपुलिन्दm. plural Name of a people View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुपुष्पm. "sea-flower", a conch-shell View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुपुत्रm. "son of the ocean", the moon View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुपुत्रm. Diospyros Tomentosa View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुरm. an elephant View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुरm. Name of the number eight View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुरद्वेषिन्m. "elephant-hater", a lion View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुरागिरिमाहात्म्यn. Name of chapter of the padma-purāṇa-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुराजm. "king of rivers", the ocean View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुराजm. "king of Sindh", Name of jayad-ratha- etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुराजm. of a muni- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुराज्ञी(s/indhu--) f. having the sindhu- as queen View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुरावm. Vitex Negundo (wrong reading for -vāra-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुसागरthe country between the mouths of the indu-s and the sea View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुषामन्(for -sāman-) n. Name of a sāman- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुसंगमm. "sea-confluence", the mouth of a river View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुसमुद्रसंगमm. Name of a place View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुसर्जm. the Sal tree View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुसौवीरm. plural Name of a people inhabiting the country round the indu-s (in compound also Name of the country) etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुसौवीरm. a king of the above people View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुसौवीरकm. plural Name of a people (= prec.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुशयनm. "ocean-reclining", Name of viṣṇu- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुषेण(for -sena-) m. Name of a king of Sindh View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुसृत्यn. the flowing in streams View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुसूनुm. patronymic of jālaṃ-dhara- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुतस्ind. from the sindhu- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुतीरसम्भवn. a kind of borax View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धूत्तमn. Name of a tīrtha- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धूत्थm. the moon View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धूत्थn. rock-salt. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुवाहस्(s/indhu--) mfn. (perhaps) passing through the sea or navigating (according to to = nadīnām pravāhayitā-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुवक्त्रName of a place (See saindhuvaktraka-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुवारm. Vitex Negundo View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुवारm. a horse (of a good breed) brought from Sindh (see -pāra-ja-above) . View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुवारकm. () Vitex Negundo. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुवारिकाf. () () Vitex Negundo. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुवारितm. () Vitex Negundo. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुवासिन्mfn. living in Sindh View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुवासिनीf. Name of the family-deity of the māṇṭi-s View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुवेषणm. Gmelina Arborea View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुवीर्यm. Name of a king of the Madras View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्धुवृषm. Name of viṣṇu- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्दुकm. (of unknown derivation) equals sinduvāra- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्दुकाf. idem or 'm. (of unknown derivation) equals sinduvāra- ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्दूरm. (according to to ,fr. syand-) a sort of tree View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्दूरm. a proper N. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्दूरn. red lead, minium, vermilion etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्दूरn. (equals rakta-śāsana-, rāja-lekha-,and rāja-lekhitadakṣiṇa- ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्दूरकारणn. "origin of minium", lead View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्दूरनिर्गमm. Name of a chapter of View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्दूरप्रकारm. Name of work (also sindūraprakāraṭīkā -ṭīkā- f.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्दूरप्रकारटीकाf. sindūraprakāra
सिन्दूरपुष्पीf. a kind of plant (equals vīra-puṣpī-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्दूररसm. a particular preparation of quicksilver View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्दूरतिलकm. (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' f(ā-).) a mark on the forehead made with red lead View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्दूरतिलकm. "marked with red lead", an elephant View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्दूरतिलकाf. a woman whose forehead is marked with red lead (and therefore whose husband is living) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्दूरीf. red cloth or clothes View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्दूरीf. Grislea Tomentosa View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्दूरीf. another plant (equals -puṣpī-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्दूरीf. equals rocanī- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्दूरिकाf. red lead, minium View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्दूरितmfn. reddened, made red View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्दुवारm. (see sindhu-v-) Vitex Negundo (also raka- ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्दुवारn. the berry of that plant View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिनीf. equals sinīvālī- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिनी(f. of prec.) , in compound (?) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिनीपतिm. Name of a warrior (varia lectio śin-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिनीवाकm. Name of a man (varia lectio sil-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिनीवालीf. (of doubtful derivation) Name of a goddess (in described as broad-hipped, fair-armed, fair-fingered, presiding over fecundity and easy birth, and invoked with sarasvatī-, rākā- etc.; in she is called the wife of viṣṇu-; in later Vedic texts she is the presiding deity of the first day of new moon, as rākā- of the actual day of full moon) , the first day of new moon when it rises with a scarcely visible crescent etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिनीवालीf. Name of a daughter of aṅgiras- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिनीवालीf. of the wife of dhātṛ- and mother of darśa- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिनीवालीf. of durgā- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिनीवालीf. of a river View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिनीवालीकुहूशान्तिf. Name of a religious ceremony (for averting the evil effects of being born on sinīvālī- and kuhū- days) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिन्व्See ninv-, p.549. column 2.
सिन्व sinvat- See a-s-, . View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
आभासिन्mfn. in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' shining like, having the appearance of View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अभयगिरिवासिन्m. plural "dwelling on the mountain of safety", Name of a division of kātyāyana-'s pupils View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अभिधाध्वंसिन्mfn. losing one's, name. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अभीप्सिन्mfn. (ifc.) equals abhīpsat- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अभिशंसिन्See mithyābhiśaṃsin-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अभ्यासिन्mfn. (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound') practising, repeating View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अभ्यासिन्mfn. equals abhyāsa-vat- q.v View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अब्रह्मवर्चसिन्m. not an excellent theologian, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अधिवासिन्mfn. inhabiting, settled in. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अध्यासिन्mfn. sitting down or seated upon. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अघशंसिन्mfn. confessing sin View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अजिनवासिन्mfn. clad in a skin View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अम्बुवासिनी f. the trumpet flower (Bignonia Suaveolens) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अमृतप्रासिन्m. "living on amṛta-", a god View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अनिष्टाशंसिन्mfn. indicating or boding evil. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अन्तवासिन् equals ante-vāsin- q.v View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अन्तेवासिन्See . View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अन्तेवासिन्mfn. dwelling near the boundaries, dwelling close by View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अन्तेवासिन्m. a pupil who dwells near or in the house of his teacher etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अन्तेवासिन्m. equals ante-'vasāyin- q.v View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अनूद्भासिन्mfn. not shining forth, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अनुशासिन्mfn. punishing View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अनुशासिन्ruling, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अनुवासिन्mfn. residing, resident. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अपध्वंसिन्mfn. causing to fall, destroying, abolishing. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अरण्यवासिन्mfn. living in a forest View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अरण्यवासिन्m. a forest beast View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अरण्यवासिन्m. "forest-dweller", a hermit View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अरण्यवासिनीf. Name of a plant. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अरसासिन्mfn. eating sapless or dry food View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अरिशासिन्mfn. chastising enemies, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अर्शसिन्mfn. equals arśasa- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अर्थसंन्यासिन्mfn. renouncing an advantage. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
आशंसिन्mfn. in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' announcing, promising View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
असंवत्सरवासिन्mfn. not staying a whole year (with the teacher) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
आसन्ननिवासिन्mfn. living in the vicinity, a neighbour View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
आसिनासिm. (fr. asi-nāsa- gaRa taulvaly-ādi- ), a descendant of asināsa-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
असिन्वmf(-)n. insatiable View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
असिन्वत्mfn. idem or 'mf(-)n. insatiable ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
आश्रमवासिन् m. an inhabitant of a hermitage, an ascetic View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
आसुरिवासिन्m. Name of prāśnī-putra- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
आश्वासिन्mfn. breathing freely, reviving, becoming cheerful View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
आत्मप्रशंसिन्mfn. equals -praśaṃsaka- q.v View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अट्टहासिन्m. Name of śiva-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अत्यन्तवासिन्m. a student who perpetually resides with his teacher.
अवभासिन्mfn. shining, bright (said of the outer skin of a snake) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अवभासिन्mfn. making manifest View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अवासिन्mfn. (gaRa grāhy-ādi- q.v) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
आवासिन्mfn. in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' abiding or dwelling in. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अविभ्रंसिन्mfn. not crumbling to pieces View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अविदासिन्mfn. not drying up (as a pond), perennial View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अविश्वासिन्mfn. mistrustful View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
आयासिन्mfn. making exertion, active, laborious View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
आयासिन्mfn. exhausted by labour, wearied. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
अयोध्यावासिन्mfn. inhabiting ayodhyā-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
बह्वासिन्त्वn. bahvāśin
बाह्यवासिन्mfn. dwelling outside a village or town (said of caṇḍila-s) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
बकसहवासिन्m. "fellow-lodger of the heron", a lotus flower View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
बलाकापङ्क्तिहासिन्mfn. smiling with rows of cranes View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
बलासिन्mfn. consumptive, phthisical View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
बलिध्वंसिन्m. "destroyer of bali-" idem or 'm. "hater of bali-", Name of viṣṇu- ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
भक्तिरसामृतसिन्धुm. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
भण्डहासिनीf. a harlot, prostitute View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
भाण्डीरवनवासिन्m. Name of kṛṣṇa- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
भरुकच्छनिवासिन्m. an inhabitant of bharu-kaccha- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
भासिन्mfn. shining, brilliant (See ūrdhva--and jyotir-bh-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
भासिन् bhāsura- See above. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
भवसिन्धु() m. equals -jala-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
भूमिवासिन्mfn. dwelling on the ground floor View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
भुवनशासिन्m. "world-ruler", a king, prince View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
बिलासिन्m. (for bila-vāsin-?) a serpent View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
बिलवासिन्mfn. equals prec. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
बिलवासिन्m. an animal that lives in holes View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
बिलवासिन्m. a snake View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
बिलेवासिन्mfn. and m. equals bila-v- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
बिसिनीf. a lotus (the whole plant) or an assemblage of lotus-flowers View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
बिसिनीपत्त्रn. a lotus-leaf. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ब्रह्मचारिवासिन्mfn. living as a brahma--ca1rin etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ब्राह्मणाच्छंसिन्m. (fr. ṇāt-śaṃ-) "reciting after the brāhmaṇa- or the brahman-", a priest who assists the brahman- or chief priest at a soma- sacrifice View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ब्राह्मणाच्छंसिनोक्थ्यn. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ब्रह्मावबोधविवेकसिन्धुm. brahmāvabodha
ब्रह्मवर्चसिन्mfn. eminent in sacred knowledge, holy (Comparative degree s/i-tara-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ब्रह्मयशसिन्mfn. renowned for sanctity View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
बुद्धिविलासिनीf. Name of commentator or commentary on View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
चक्राधिवासिन्m. "abode for cakra-(-va1ka) birds", the orange-tree View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
चमसिन्mfn. entitled to receive a camasa- (filled with soma-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
चमसिन्m. Name of a man gaRa 1. naḍādi-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
चारुहासिन्mfn. smiling sweetly View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
चारुहासिनीf. a metre of 4 x 14 syllabic instants. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
चातुर्मासिन्mfn. equals saka- Va1rtt. 5. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
चत्वरवासिनीf. (see catuṣpatha-niketā-) Name of one of the mothers attending on skanda- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
छत्त्रसिन्हn. Name of a tīrtha- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
चिरप्रवासिन्mfn. long absent View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
दद्रुनासिनीf. "removing leprosy", Name of an insect (varia lectio dara-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
दंष्ट्रानिवासिन्m. Name of a yakṣa- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
दण्डवासिन्m. idem or 'm. a door-keeper ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
दण्डवासिन्m. "a village-head" View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
दर्शपूर्णमासिन्mfn. offering ṣṭi- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
देशवासिन्mfn. residing in a country View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
देवयशसिन्mfn. of divine gods View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
धर्मसिन्धुm. "ocean of law"Name of several works. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
धर्मसिन्धुसारm. "essence of the ocean of law", Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
धेनुकध्वंसिन्m. "slayer of dhenuka-", kṛṣṇa- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ध्वंसिन्mfn. perishing, disappearing View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ध्वंसिन्mfn. destroying, removing etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ध्वंसिन्m. equals dhvaṃsī- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ध्वंसिन्m. a kind of pīlu--tree View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
दिक्करवासिनीf. a form of devī- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
दिनोपवासिन्mfn. fasting by day View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
द्रप्सिन्mfn. falling in drops View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
द्रप्सिन्mfn. flowing thickly View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
द्रप्सिन्mfn. distilling. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
द्रुमवासिन्m. "tree-dweller", ape (Bombay edition). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
दुग्धसिन्धुm. idem or 'm. the sea of milk ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
दुराशंसिन्mfn. foreboding evil View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
दुरावासिन्mfn. having a bad dwelling View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
दूरवासिन्mfn. residing in a distant land View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
दुर्गनिवासिन्mfn. dwelling in a stronghold View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
द्युसिन्धु() f. equals -nadī-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
गगनाधिवासिन्m. equals na-ga- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
गगनसिन्धुf. the heavenly gaṅgā- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
गङ्गावासिन्mfn. dwelling on the Ganges. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
घोररासिन्for -vāśin-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
गिरिवासिन्m. "living or growing on or in mountains", a kind of bulbous plant (hasti-kanda-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ग्रामनिवासिन्mfn. living in villages (birds) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ग्रामवासिन्mfn. () living in villages, tame View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ग्रामवासिन्m. equals -vāstavya- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ग्रामेवासिन्mfn. equals ma-v- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
गृहवासिन्mfn. living in one's own house View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
गृहेवासिन्mfn. living in a house View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
गुहावासिन्m. "dwelling in secret", Name of a muni- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
गुरुकुलावासिन्m. "abiding in la- ", a pupil View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
हंसिन्mfn. (prob.) containing the Universal Soul (said of kṛṣṇa-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
हंसिनीf. a particular manner of walking View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
हरिभक्तिरसामृतसिन्धुm. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
हासिन्mfn. laughing, smiling at (compound) etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
हासिन्mfn. dazzlingly white (see under hāsa-), brilliant or adorned with View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
हासिनीf. Name of an apsaras- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
हस्तियशसिहस्तिवर्चसिन्mfn. (?)having an elephant's magnificence and splendour View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
हट्टविलासिनीf. "dallying in market-places", a wanton woman, prostitute View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
हट्टविलासिनीf. a sort of perfume (equals dhamanī-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
हट्टविलासिनीf. turmeric (equals haridrā-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
हायनसिन्धुm. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
हिक्काश्वासिन्mfn. equals śvāsa-hikkin- (q.v) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
होत्राशांसिन्m. "reciting the part of the hotṛ-", an assistant of the hotṛ-, hotraka- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
होतुरन्तेवसिन्m. the pupil of a hotṛ- priest View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
जालहासिनीf. Name of a wife of kṛṣṇa- (varia lectio cāru-h-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
जलत्रासिन्mfn. hydrophobic View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
जलवासिन्mfn. living in water View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
जलवासिन्m. Name of a bulbous plant View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
जिघांसिन्mfn. in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' intending to kill View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ज्योतिर्भासिन्mfn. brilliant with light View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
कैलासशिखरवासिन्m. "dwelling on the summit of the kailāsa-", Name of śiva-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
कालीविलासिन्m. "the husband of kālī-", a form of śiva- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
कल्पान्तवासिन्mfn. living at the end of a kalpa-
कामध्वंसिन्m. "subduing the god of love", Name of śiva- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
कामवासिन्mfn. dwelling where one pleases, choosing or changing one's residence at will View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
काम्पीलवासिन्mfn. dwelling in that town View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
कान्तारवासिनीf. "wood-dwelling", Name of durgā- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
कारणध्वंसिन्mfn. idem or 'mf(ikā-)n. removing a cause.' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
कासिन्mfn. having a cough View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
खदूरवासिनीf. (with Buddhists) Name of a female deity or śakti- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
खरध्वंसिन्m. "destroyer of the demon khara-", Name of rāma- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
खर्ववासिन्mfn. being or abiding in a mutilated object View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
खसिन्धुm. (see -camasa-) Name of the moon View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
खसिन्धुSee 3. kh/a-, p.334. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
किलासिन्mfn. leprous View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
कोलाविध्वंसिन्m. plural Name of a royal family View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
कोशवासिन्m. "living in a shell", any animal incased in a shell View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
कोशवासिन्m. a chrysalis or pupa View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
कोटरवासिनीf. "dwelling in hollow trees", white variety of Ipomoea Turpethum View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
क्रतुध्वंसिन्m. "destroyer of dakṣa-'s sacrifice", Name of śiva- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
कृपासिन्धुm. idem or 'm. "an ocean of compassion", = kṛpākara-.' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
क्षणविध्वंसिन्mfn. collapsing or perishing in a moment View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
क्षणविध्वंसिन्m. "one who professes the doctrine of the kṣaṇa-vidhaṃsa- (equals -bhaṅga- q.v) ", a Buddhist. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
क्षारसिन्धुm. idem or 'm. the salt ocean ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
क्षतविध्वंसिन्m. "removing sores", the plant Argyreia speciosa or argentea View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
क्षयकासिन्mfn. one who has a consumptive cough. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
क्षीणवासिन्mfn. inhabiting a dilapidated house View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
क्षीणवासिन्m. a dove or pigeon View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
क्षीरसिन्धुm. equals -dhi- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
कुलपांसिन्mf(ī-)n., disgracing a family, etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
कुण्डवासिनीf. "pitcher-dwelling", gautama-'s tutelar deity View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
कुसिन्धn. a trunk View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
लासिन्mfn. moving to and fro, dancing (see raṅga-lāsinī-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
लवणसिन्धुm. the salt-sea, sea, ocean commentator or commentary View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
मध्वार्थध्वंसिनीn. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
मद्यवासिनीf. equals -puṣpā- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
महामेघनिवासिन्m. "dwelling in thick clouds", Name of śiva- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
महासाहसिन्mfn. equals -rāhasika- mfn. (q.v) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
महाविहारवासिन्m. plural Name of a Buddhist sect View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
मलयवासिनीf. "dwelling on the Malaya mountain", Name of durgā- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
मांसिनी f. Nardostachys Jatamansi View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
मनसिन्mfn. having a mind or soul, having intellect View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
मन्दरवासिनीf. "dwelling on mandara-", Name of durgā- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
मनुष्ययशसिन्mfn. possessing human glory View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
मर्त्यनिवासिन्m. a mortal inhabitant (of the world), man, mankind View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
मरुकच्छनिवासिन्mfn. inhabiting it View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
मर्यादासिन्धुm. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
मसिनmfn. well ground, finely pounded View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
मसिनmfn. kinship through the right of presenting the piṇḍa- to a common progenitor (equals sa-piṇḍaka-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
मासोपवासिन्mfn. one who fasts for a month View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
मासोपवासिनीf. a lascivious woman, procuress View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
मत्सिन्mfn. containing fish, marked by water (as a boundary) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
मत्तविलासिनीf. Name of a metre View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
मेघनादानुलासिन्m. "rejoicing in the rumbling of clouds", a peacock View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
मिथ्याभिशंसिन्mfn. making a false accusation View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
मोघहासिन्mfn. laughing causelessly View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
मृषानुशासिन्(mṛṣān-) mfn. punishing unjustly View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
मुहूर्तसिन्धुm. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
मुखनिवासिनीf. "dwelling in the mouth", Name of sarasvatī- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
मूलवासिन्mfn. (said of the yavanā-s) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
नभःसिन्धुf. the celestial Ganges View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
नभःसिन्धुपुत्रm. patronymic of bhīma-, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
नगरवासिन्mfn. "town-dwelling", a citizen View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
नेत्रनिंसिन्mfn. (sleep) kissing or touching the eye View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
निदाघसिन्धुm. a river in hot weather, one nearly dry View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
नीललोहितान्तेवासिन्m. śiva-'s pupil id est paraśu-rāma- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
नीलसिन्धुकm. Vitex Negundo View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
निंसिन्mfn. touching, kissing (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound'; see netra--). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
निरन्तरग्रिहवासिन्mfn. living in the next house View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
निर्दरवासिन्mfn. inhabiting a cave View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
निर्णयसिन्धुm. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
निसिन्धु m. Vitex Negundo (see sindhu-, sindhu-vāra-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
निसिन्धुकm. Vitex Negundo (see sindhu-, sindhu-vāra-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
निष्कासिन्mfn. who or what expels View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
निष्कासिनीf. a female slave not restrained by her master View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
नित्यसंन्यासिन्m. always an ascetic View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
निवासिन्mfn. dressed in, wearing (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound') View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
निवासिन्mfn. dwelling or living or being or sticking in (compound) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
निवासिन्m. an inhabitant View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
न्यासिन्mfn. one who has abandoned all worldly concerns View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
पद्मलीलाविलासिनीf. Name of an astronomy work
पांसिन्mfn. equals sana- (only f. vocative case sini-in kula-p- , where Bombay edition sani-; see under pāṃsana-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
पानसिन्धु -saindhava- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
पाण्डरवासिन्mfn. idem or '(p/ā-) mfn. white-robed ' (varia lectio pāṇḍura-v-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
पाण्डरवासिनीf. Name of a tantra- deity View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
पाण्डुरवासिन्mfn. white-robed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
पण्यविलासिनीf. equals -yoṣit- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
पण्यविलासिनीf. Unguis Odoratus View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परासिन्mfn. throwing or measuring the distance of anything thrown View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
पारेसिन्धुind. on the other side of the sindhu-, beyond the indu-s View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परिध्वंसिन्mfn. falling off View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
परिध्वंसिन्mfn. destroying, ruining (varia lectio) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
पर्णविलासिनीf. a particular fragrant substance View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
पर्वतवासिन्mfn. living in mountains View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
पर्वतवासिन्m. a mountaineer View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
पर्वतवासिन्m. Name of durgā- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
पर्वतवासिनीf. nard, spikenard View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
पातालवासिन्m. equals -nilaya- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
पटवासिनीf. a kind of woman View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
पीनसिन्() mfn. -having a cold View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
पिपासिन्() mfn. thirsty, athirst. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
प्रध्वंसिन्mfn. passing away, transitory, perishable (utpanna-p-,arisen and passing away again id est having no further consequences commentator or commentary) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
प्रध्वंसिन्mfn. (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound') destroying, annihilating View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
प्रघासिन्() mfn. voracious. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
प्रहासिन्mfn. laughing, derisive, satirical View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
प्रहासिन्mfn. shining bright View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
प्रहासिन्m. the buffoon of a drama (equals vidūṣaka-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
प्रजापतिनिवासिनीf. Name of a gandharvī- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
प्रान्तनिवासिन्mfn. dwelling near the boundaries View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
प्रासादवासिन्mfn. dwelling in a palace View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
प्रशंसिन्mfn. (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound') praising, commending, eulogizing View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
प्रस्रंस्रंसिन्mfn. letting fall, dropping, miscarrying View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
प्रथमवयसिन्mfn. young View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
प्रतिवासिन्mfn. neighbouring, a neighbour View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
प्रतिवेशवासिन्(pr/ati--or pratī--; see Va1rtt. 3) mf(-)n. living in the neighbourhood View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
प्रतिवेशवासिन्(pr/ati--or pratī--; see Va1rtt. 3) m.f. a neighbour View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
प्रवासिन्mfn. dwelling abroad, absent from home View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
प्रेष्यान्तेवासिन्m. plural servants and pupils, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
प्रोल्लासिन्(pra-ull-) mfn. shining, resplendent View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
पुरासिनीf. a species of creeper View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
पुरवासिन्mfn. dwelling in a town, a citizen View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
पूर्वासिन्mfn. shooting before (another) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
पूर्ववयसिन्mfn. being in the first period of life, young View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
रजःसुवासिनीf. a girl that has menstruated but still lives in her father's house View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
राजवर्चसिन्mfn. being in royal service View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
रक्तवासिन्mfn. idem or 'mfn. wearing red garments ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
रङ्गलासिनीf. Nyctanthes Arbor Tristis View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
रसामृतसिन्धुm. rasāmṛta
रससिन्धुm. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
रससिन्दूरn. a sort of factitious cinnabar (used as an escharotic) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
रसिन्See a-ras-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
रसिन्mfn. juicy, liquid (as soma-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
रसिन्mfn. impassioned View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
रसिन्mfn. having good taste, aesthetic View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
रासिन्See ghora-rāsin-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
रसोल्लासिन्mfn. rasollāsa
राष्ट्रवासिन्m. an inhabitant of a kingdom, subject View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
शब्दसंदर्भसिन्धुm. (see śadārnavābhidhāna-) Name of a lexicon (compiled for Sir Jones by kāśīnātha- bhaṭṭācārya-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सद्मनिवासिन्mfn. dwelling in houses View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सदोपवासिन्mfn. always fasting
सागरवासिन्mfn. dwelling on the sea-shore View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सहनिवासिन्mfn. dwelling together with (instrumental case; sahanivāsitā si-- f.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सहसिन्mfn. powerful, mighty View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
साहसिन्mfn. rash, precipitate, inconsiderate, foolhardy View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
साहसिन्mfn. cruel, violent, ferocious View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
साहसोपन्यासिन्mfn. suggesting violent deeds View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सहवासिन्mfn. one who lives with another, a fellow-lodger or neighbour
सह्यवासिनीf. "inhabiting the sahya- mountains"Name of durgā- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सक्तुसिन्धुm. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
समधिकतरोच्छ्वासिन्mfn. breathing or sighing more heavily View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सामन्तवासिन्mfn. dwelling on the borders, neighbouring, a neighbour View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
समासिन्See vyāsa-s-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
संक्षिप्तनिर्णयसिन्धुm. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
संनिवासिन्mfn. dwelling, inhabiting (See vana-s-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
संन्यासिन्mfn. laying aside, giving up, abandoning, renouncing View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
संन्यासिन्mfn. abstaining from food View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
संन्यासिन्m. one who abandons or resigns worldly affairs, an ascetic, devotee (who has renounced all earthly concerns and devotes himself, to meditation and the study of the āraṇyaka-s or upaniṣada-s, a Brahman in the fourth āśrama- [ quod vide ] or stage of his life, a religious mendicant; see ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
संन्यासिन्दर्शनn. Name of a chapter of the View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
संन्यासिन्समाराधनn. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
संन्यासिन्संध्याf. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
शंसिन्mfn. (only in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound') reciting, uttering, announcing, telling, relating, betraying, predicting, promising View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
समुद्रवासिन्mfn. dwelling near the sea View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
समुल्लासिन्mfn. shining forth, glittering View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
संवासिन्mfn. (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound') clothed in View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
संवासिन्mfn. dwelling together, a fellow-dweller View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
संवासिन्mfn. (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound') dwelling in, inhabiting View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
संवत्सरवासिन्mfn. dwelling (with a teacher) for a year View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
शम्यापरासिन्mfn. measuring the distance of the cast of a śamyā- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सारसिन्धुm. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
शरत्पर्वशसिन्m. śaratparvan
शर्वपर्वतवासिनीf. Name of durgā- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सर्ववासिन्m. equals -vāsa- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सर्वावासिन्() mfn. having one's abode everywhere. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सर्ववेदसिन्mfn. giving away all one's property View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
शासिन्mfn. (only in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound') punishing, chastising View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
शासिन्mfn. governing, ruling View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
शासिन्mfn. teaching, instructing View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सौभनिवासिन्m. plural the inhabitants of Saubha View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सौभासिनिकn. (with ratna-) a kind of jewel View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सौवासिनीf. equals su-vāsinī- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
शवसिन्mfn. idem or 'mfn. mighty, powerful ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सवासिन्mfn. dwelling together View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सेवाविलासिनीf. a female servant View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिद्धान्तसिन्धुm. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिद्धसिन्धुm. "river of the siddha-s", Name of the heavenly Ganges. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिकतासिन्धुName of a place View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
शिखरवासिनीf. "dwelling on a peak (of the himālaya-)", Name of durgā- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सिंहसिद्धान्तसिन्धुm. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सितसिन्धुf. the Ganges View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
श्मशानालयवासिन्mfn. inhabiting burning grounds (Name of śiva-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
श्मशानालयवासिनीf. Name of kālī- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
श्मशाननिवासिन्mfn. dwelling in burning-grounds, a ghost, spectre View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
श्मशानवासिन्mfn. dwelling in burning-grounds View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
श्मशानवासिन्m. Name of śiva- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
श्मशानवासिनीf. Name of kālī- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
स्मृतिसिन्धुm. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सोमसिन्धुm. "ocean of soma-", Name of viṣṇu- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
स्रंसिन्mfn. becoming loose, falling down, slipping off View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
स्रंसिन्mfn. depending, pendulous View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
स्रंसिन्mfn. letting fall, miscarrying View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
स्रंसिन्m. Careya Arborea or Salvadora Persica View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
स्रंसिनीफलm. the śirīṣa- tree View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
श्रियावासिन्m. "dwelling with śrī-", Name of śiva- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
शुभशंसिन्mfn. indicative of good luck, auspicious View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सुधासिन्धुm. the ocean of nectar View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सुहासिन्mfn. laughing id est radiant or shining with (compound) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सुरसिन्धुf. equals -sarit- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सुरसिन्धुf. equals mandākinī- (Scholiast or Commentator) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सुरविलासिनीf. a heavenly nymph, apsaras-
सुरविलासिनीf. a proper N. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सूर्यशिष्यान्तेवासिन्m. Name of janaka- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सूर्यविकासिन्mfn. expanding at the appearing of the sun View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सुशंसिन्mfn. announcing or wishing good things View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सुवर्चसिन्m. Name of śiva- (see prec.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सुवर्चसिन्m. natron, alkali View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सुवासिन्mfn. dwelling in a comfortable or respectable abode View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सुवासिनीf. a woman married or single who resides in her father's house (see sva-v-) (varia lectio) etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सुवासिनीf. a term of courtesy for a respectable woman whose husband is alive View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
सुयवसिन्mfn. having good pasturage View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
स्वःसिन्धुf. equals -sarit- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
स्वर्णसिन्दूरm. a particular medicinal preparation View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
श्वासकासिन्mfn. śvāsakāsa
श्वासिन्mfn. hissing, breathing View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
श्वासिन्mfn. breathing hard, asthmatic View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
श्वासिन्mfn. aspirated (as a sound or letter) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
श्वासिन्m. wind View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
स्ववासिन्n. dual number (with jamad-agneḥ-) Name of two sāman-s View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
स्ववासिनीf. a woman whether married or unmarried who continues to dwell after maturity in her father's house (see su-v-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
तालवृन्तनिवासिन्m. Name of a scholiast View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
तत्रवासिन्mfn. dwelling there, .
तत्सिन(t/at--) mfn. wishing to acquire or ordering that View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
तीर्थवासिन्mfn. dwelling at a tīrtha-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
तोयाधिवासिनीf. equals ya-puṣpī- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
त्रासिन्mfn. fearful View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
उभयवासिन्mfn. living or abiding in both (places) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
उच्छ्वासिन्mfn. breathing out, expiring View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
उच्छ्वासिन्mfn. breathing View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
उच्छ्वासिन्mfn. sighing View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
उच्छ्वासिन्mfn. swelling up, rising, coming forward etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
उच्छ्वासिन्mfn. pausing ([ ]) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
उदासिन्mfn. indifferent, disregarding View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
उदासिन्mfn. one who has no desire nor affection for anything View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
उदासिन्m. a stoic, philosopher View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
उदासिन्m. (in popular acceptation) any religious mendicant (or one of a particular order) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
उदवासिन्mfn. living in water View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
उद्भासिन्mfn. shining, radiant View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
उद्भासिन्mfn. coming forth, appearing View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
उद्भासिन्mfn. giving or causing splendour View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
उद्दासिन्mfn. gaRa grāhy-ādi- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
उद्वासिन्mfn. gaRa balādi- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
उद्विकासिन्mfn. ( kas-), blown, expanded, open View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
उक्थशंसिन्mfn. praising View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
उक्थशंसिन्mfn. uttering the uktha-s. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
उल्लासिन्mfn. playing, sporting, dancing. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
उपहासिन्mfn. in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' deriding, ridiculing View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
उपवासिन्mfn. one who observes a fast, fasting View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ऊर्ध्वभासिन्mfn. flaming or radiating upwards View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ऊर्ध्ववासिन्m. plural Name (also title or epithet) of a class of ascetics, (Bombay edition) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ऊर्ध्वोच्छ्वासिन्mfn. breathing one's last View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
वाग्विलासिन्m. a pigeon, dove View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
वैदेशिकनिवासिन्mfn. (plural) foreign and native View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
वैश्यध्वंसिन्mfn. destroying vaiśya- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
वनाधिवासिन्mfn. dwelling in a forest View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
वनान्तवासिन्mfn. dwelling in a forest View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
वनसंनिवासिन्mfn. dwelling in a forest View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
वनसंनिवासिन्m. a forester View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
वनसिन्धुरm. equals -karin- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
वनाश्रमनिवासिन्m. a vānaprastha- or Brahman dwelling in a forest, an anchorite. () View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
वनवासिन्mfn. living in a forest View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
वनवासिन्m. a forest-dweller, hermit, anchorite etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
वनवासिन्m. Name of various plants or roots (equals ṛṣabha-, muṣkaka-, varāhī-kanda-etc.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
वनवासिन्m. a crow View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
वनवासिन्m. Name of a country in the Dekhan (also simaṇḍala-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
वनविलासिनीf. Andropogon Auriculatus View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
वनेवासिन्m. "forest-dweller", a Brahman in the third stage of his life, a vānaprastha-
वारविलासिनी() f. equals -kanyakā-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
वर्चसिन्See brahma-- and su-v- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
वर्गप्रशंसिन्mfn. praising one's own class or set (relatives, dependants etc.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
वर्णविलासिनीf. turmeric View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
वसिन्m. (fr. vasā-) an otter View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
वासिन्mfn. fragrant View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
वासिन्mfn. having or wearing clothes, (especially in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound') clothed or dressed in, wearing View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
वासिन्mfn. staying, abiding, dwelling, living, inhabiting (often in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' = living in or among or in a particular manner or condition) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
वासिनायनिm. patronymic fr. vāsin- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
वासिनीf. a Barleria with white flowers View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
वसुधाविलासिन्m. a king, prince View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
वटवासिन्m. "dwelling in the Banyan tree", a yakṣa- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
वत्सिन्mfn. having a calf View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
वत्सिन्m. "having many children (?)", Name of viṣṇu- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
वयसिन्See pūrva-- and prathama-v-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
वेदसंन्यासिन्( on ) m. a Brahman in the fourth period of his life who has discontinued all recitation of the veda- and performance of Vedic rites. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
वेदसंन्यासिन्mfn. abandoning the veda-, ibidem or 'in the same place or book or text' as the preceding View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
वेदसिनीf. Name of a river (varia lectio vetasinī-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
वेदविलासिनीf. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
वेलाविलासिनीf. a courtezan View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
वेतसिनीf. Name of a river (see vedasinī-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
विभूषणोद्भासिन्mfn. glittering with ornaments View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
विदासिन्See a-vidāsin-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
विदेशवासिन्mfn. dwelling abroad View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
विध्वंसिन्mfn. falling to pieces, perishing View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
विध्वंसिन्mfn. causing to fall, ruining, destroying etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
विध्वंसिन्mfn. insulting, violating (a woman) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
विध्वंसिन्mfn. hostile, adverse View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
विध्वंसिनीf. a particular magical formula View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
विद्याभीप्सिन्(yabh-) mfn. desiring knowledge View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
विकासिन्mfn. blossoming, blooming View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
विकासिन्mfn. opened, open (as the eyes or nose) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
विकासिन्mfn. open = candid, sincere View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
विकासिन्mfn. expanding, developing View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
विकासिन्mfn. extensive, great View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
विकासिन्mfn. (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound') rich or abounding in View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
विकासिन्mfn. dissolving, relaxing, paralysing View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
विकासिनीलोत्पल -si-nīlotpala- Nom. P. lati- to resemble a blossoming blue lotus-flower View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
विलासिन्mfn. shining, beaming, radiant View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
विलासिन्mfn. moving to and fro, fluttering View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
विलासिन्mfn. wanton, sportive, playful, dallying with or fond of (compound) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
विलासिन्mfn. coquettish View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
विलासिन्m. "sporter", a lover, husband ( also "a sensualist;a serpent;fire;the moon;Name of kṛṣṇa-, of śiva-, and of kāma-deva-") View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
विलासिन्m. a kind of metre View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
विलासिन्m. Name of a woman View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
विलासिनीf. a charming or lively or wanton or coquettish woman, wife, mistress (also vilāsinikā nikā-f. ; vilāsinījana -jana- m. ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
विलासिनीजनm. vilāsinī
विलासिनिकाf. vilāsinī
विन्ध्याचलवासिनीf. a form of durgā- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
विन्ध्याधिवासिनीf. a form of durgā- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
विन्ध्याद्रिवासिनीf. equals vindhya-vās-? View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
विन्ध्यकैलासवासिनीf. a form of durgā- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
विन्ध्यनिवासिन्m. Name of vyāḍi- (see -vāsin-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
विन्ध्यान्तवासिन्m. plural the inhabitants of the inner vindhya- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
विन्ध्यवासिन्mfn. dwelling in the vindhya- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
विन्ध्यवासिन्m. Name of vyāḍi-
विन्ध्यवासिन्m. of a medical writer View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
विन्ध्यवासिन्m. Name of a place View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
विन्ध्यवासिन् m. Name (also title or epithet) of a sāṃkhya- teacher. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
विन्ध्यवासिनीf. (with or without devī-) a form of durgā- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
विन्ध्यवासिनीदशकn. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
विनिपातशंसिन्mfn. announcing misfortune or destruction, portentous View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
विषयवासिन्mfn. inhabiting a country (anya-viṣaya-v-,the inhabitant of another country) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
विषयवासिन्mfn. engaged in the affairs of life View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
विस्रंस्रंसिन्mfn. falling or slipping down (as a garland) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
विश्वासिन्mfn. confiding, trustful View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
विश्वासिन्mfn. trusty, confidential, trustworthy, honest View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
विवादसिन्धुm. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
विवेकसारसिन्धुm. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
विवेकसिन्धुm. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
वृन्दसिन्धुm. Name of medical work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
वृषभासुरविध्वंसिन्m. "slayer of the asura- vṛṣabha-", Name of viṣṇu- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
व्याधिसिन्धुm. "sea of diseases", nickname of a physician View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
व्याससमासिन्mfn. diffuse and concise View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
यशसिन्mfn. See deva-- and manuṣya-yaśas/in-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
यथानिवासिन्mfn. wherever dwelling or abiding View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
यवसिन्See -yavas/in-, -yavasy/u-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
यवासिनीf. a district abounding in yavāsa- gaRa puṣkarādi-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
Apte Search
Results for sin51 results
sina सिन a. [सि-नक् Uṇ.3.2] 1 White. -2 One-eyed. -नः A morsel, mouthful. -नम् 1 The body. -2 Ved. Food.
sindhuḥ सिन्धुः [स्यन्द्-द्-अद् संप्रसारणं दस्य धश्च Tv.; Uṇ.1.11] 1 The sea, ocean; तावत् त्रिभुवनं सद्यः कल्पान्तैधितसिन्धवः Bhāg. 3.11.3. -2 The Indus. -3 The country around the Indus. -4 N. of a river in Mālavā; वेणीभूतप्रतनुसलिला तामतीतस्य सिन्धुः Me.29 (where Malli.'s remark सिन्धुर्नाम नदी तु कुत्रापि नास्ति is gratuitous); पारासिन्धुसंभेदमवगाह्य नगरी- मेव प्रविशावः Māl.4. 9/1 (see Dr. Bhāndārkar's note ad loc.). -5 The water ejected from an elephant's trunk. -6 The juice exuding from the temples of an elephant. -7 An elephant. -8 N. of Varuṇa. -9 White borax. -1 A kind of musical mode (राग). -pl. The inhabitants of the Sindhu country. -f. 1 A great river or river in general; पिबत्यसौ पाययते च सिन्धूः R.13.9; Me.48; Ś.5.21; Ku.3.6;5.85. -2 The river Sindhu. -Comp. -उत्थम्, -उपलम् rock-salt. -कन्या N. of Lakshmī -कफः cuttle-fish bone. -खेलः the country Sindha. -ज, -जन्मन् a. 1 aquatic. -2 river-born. -3 Sea-born, born in the Sindha country. (-जः) the moon. (-जम्) rock-salt. -जा f. N. of Lakṣmī. -नन्दनः, -पुत्रः the moon. -नाथः the ocean. -पर्णी, -वेषणम् Gmelina Arborea (Mar. थोरशिवणी). -पिबः N. of Agastya. -पुष्पः a conch-shell. -मन्थजम् rock-salt. -राजः, -पतिः N. of Jayadratha; Ve.3. -लवणम् rock-salt. -वारः a horse of good breed (brought from Sindha or Persia). -शयनः N. of Viṣṇu. -सङ्गमः confluence of rivers; (also with the ocean). -सागरः the country between the mouths of the Indus and the sea. -सौवीराः N. of a people inhabiting the country round the Indus.
sindhuka सिन्धुक a. Marine. सिन्धुकः sindhukḥ सिन्धुवारः sindhuvārḥ सिन्धुकः सिन्धुवारः N. of a tree.
sindhuraḥ सिन्धुरः 1 An elephant; नैवान्यत्र मदान्धसिन्धुरघटासंघट्ट- घण्टारणत्कारः Vālmīkī's Gaṅgāṣṭaka 2; स सिन्धुरः सैनिकानां चकार कदनं महत् Śiva B.3.16. -2 N. of the number 'eight'. -Comp. -वदनः N. of Ganeśa; स जयति सिन्धुरवदनः Maṅgalācharaṇa&m 1.
sindūraḥ सिन्दूरः [स्यन्द्-उरन् संप्रसारणम् Uṇ.1.68] A kind of tree. -रम् Red lead; स्वयं सिन्दूरेण द्विपरणमुदा मुद्रित इव Gīt.11; N.22.45. -Comp. -कारणम् lead. -तिलकः an elephnat. (-का) a woman whose husband is living. -रसः a particular preparation of quick-silver.
sindūrī सिन्दूरी Red cloth or clothes.
sindūrikā सिन्दूरिका Red-lead.
sindūrita सिन्दूरित a. Reddened, made red.
sinī सिनी A woman having a white complexion.
sinīvālī सिनीवाली The day preceding that of new moon, or that day on which the moon rises with a scarcely visible crescent; या पूर्वामावास्या सा सिनीवाली योत्तरा सा कुहूः Ait. Br.; or सा दृष्टेन्दुः सिनीवाली सा नष्टेन्दुकला कुहूः Ak. सिन्दुकः sindukḥ सिन्दुवारः sinduvārḥ सिन्दुवारकः sinduvārakḥ सिन्दुकः सिन्दुवारः सिन्दुवारकः (= निर्गुण्डीतरु ?) N. of a tree; दीर्घिकां प्रावृतां पश्य तीरजैः सिन्दुवारकैः Bu. Ch.4.49.
sinv सिन्व् 1 P. (सिन्वति) To wet, moisten.
adhivāsin अधिवासिन् a. 1 Inhabiting, dwelling or siting in. -2 Scenting &c.
adhyavasin अध्यवसिन् a. One who observes a vow, धर्माश्रमे$- ध्यवसिनां ब्राह्मणानां युधिष्ठिरः Mb.12.64.6.
anuvāsin अनुवासिन् a. One who dwells near; resident.
apadhvaṃsin अपध्वंसिन् a. Destroying, removing; सर्वैनसामपध्वंसि जप्यं त्रिष्वघमर्षणम् Ak.
abhyāsin अभ्यासिन् a. Practising, exercising.
āyāsin आयासिन् a. [आ-यस्-णिनि] 1 Exhausted, fatigued. -2 Making exertions, striving; मनस्तु तद्भावदर्शनायासि Ś.2.1. v. l.
āśvāsin आश्वासिन् [आ-श्वस्-णिनि] 1 Breathing freely, reviving, becoming cheerful; मनस्तु तद्भावदर्शनाश्वासि Ś.2.1. -2 Consoling.
ucchvāsin उच्छ्वासिन् a. Breathing, inhaling air. -2 Heaving, throbbing; स्तनमध्योच्छ्वासिना कथितः V.1.8; Me.14. -3 Sighing. -4 Expiring, dying. -5 Vanishing, fading away; उच्छ्वासिकालाञ्जनरागमक्ष्णोः Ku.7.82. -6 Pausing, stopping. -7 Rising, coming forward. -8 Disjointed, divided.
upavāsin उपवासिन् a. Fasting. दिनोपवासी तु निशामिषाशी जटाधरः सन् कुलटाभिलाषी । हास्यार्णवः.
ullāsin उल्लासिन् a. 1 Delighted सुमनसामुल्लासिनि मानसे Chandr. -2 Bright, splendid.
sin कासिन् a. Having cough.
dhvaṃsin ध्वंसिन् a. Destroying, demolishing, removing. -2 Falling, perishing, as in क्षणध्वंसिन्. -m. The Pīlu tree.
nivāsin निवासिन् a. 1 Dwelling, residing. -2 Wearing, dressed or clothed in; नवं नवक्षौमनिवासिनी सा Ku.7.26. -m. A resident, an inhabitant; अथानाथाः प्रकृतयो मातृ- बन्धुनिवासिनम् R.12.12.
niṣkāsinī निष्कासिनी A female slave not restrained by her master.
nyāsin न्यासिन् m. One who has renounced all worldly ties, a Saṁnyāsin; गृहस्थो येन पदवीमञ्जसा न्यासिनामियात् Bhāg.7.15.75.
paridhvaṃsin परिध्वंसिन् a. Ruining, destroying; राजकार्यपरिध्वंसी मन्त्री दोषेण लिप्यते H.2.125.
prativāsin प्रतिवासिन् a. (-नी f.) Dwelling near, neighbouring. -m. A neighbour.
pradhvaṃsin प्रध्वंसिन् a. 1 Transitory, perishable. -2 Destroying, annihilating.
pravāsin प्रवासिन् m. A traveller, wayfarer, sojourner; परलोक- नवप्रवासिनः प्रतिपत्स्ये पदवीमहं तव Ku.4.1.
prasraṃsin प्रस्रंसिन् a. Miscarrying; Suśr.
prahāsin प्रहासिन् a. 1 Causing laughter, amusing, diverting. -2 Joking, jesting. -3 Smiling with; उन्मीलत्कुटजप्रहासिषु गिरेरालम्ब्य सानूनितः Māl.9.15. -4 Shining, resplendent; विकीर्णसप्तर्षिबलिप्रहासिभिः Ku.5.37. -5 Satirical. -m. A jester, buffoon.
prollāsin प्रोल्लासिन् a. Shining, resplendent.
balāsin बलासिन् a. Consumptive.
bisinī बिसिनी 1 The lotus-plant; चिरादाशातन्तुस्त्रुटतु बिसिनी- सूत्रभिदुरः Māl.4.3; अमीषां प्राणानां तुलितबिसिनीपत्रपयसाम् Bh. 3.36. -2 Lotus-fibres. -3 An assemblage of lotuses. -Comp. -पत्रम् a lotus-leaf.
matsin मत्सिन् a. Containing fish. -2 Marked by water (as a boundary).
masina मसिन a. Pounded, well-grounded. -नम् kinship through the right of presenting the पिण्ड to the common progenitor (सापिण्ड्य).
yavāsinī यवासिनी A district abounding in Yavāsa.
rasin रसिन् a. 1 Juicy, liquid. -2 Impassioned, full of feeling. -3 Tasteful, savoury.
vatsin वत्सिन् वत्सिमन् m. Childhood, youth, early youth; धिक् चापले वत्सिमवत्सलत्वम् N.3.55.
vasin वसिन् m. An otter.
vidāsin विदासिन् a. Perishing; यथा$विदासिनः कुल्याः सरसः स्युः सहस्रशः Bhāg.1.3.26; see अविदासिन्.
vidhvaṃsin विध्वंसिन् a. 1 Being ruined, falling to pieces. -2 Hostile, adverse.
vilāsin विलासिन् a. (-नी f.) Sportive, playful, dallying, wanton, conquettish; विस्रस्तमंसादपरो विलासी R.6.14. -m. 1 A sensualist, voluptuary, an amorous person; उपमान- मभूद्विलासिनां करणं यत्तव कान्तिमत्तया Ku.4.5. -2 Fire. -3 The moon. -4 A snake. -5 An epithet of Kṛiṣṇa or Viṣṇu. -6 Of Śiva. -7 Of the god of love.
vilāsinī विलासिनी 1 A woman (in general). -2 A coquettish or wanton woman; हरिरिह मुग्धवधूनिकरे विलासिनि विलसति केलिपरे Gīt.1; Ku.7.69; Śi.8.5; R.6.17. -3 A wanton, harlot.
visinī विसिनी See विसिनी.
śaṃsin शंसिन् a. (Usually at the end of comp.) 1 Praising. -2 Telling, announcing, communicating; प्रजावती दोहदशंसिनी ते R.14.45. -3 Indicating, bespeaking; मूर्धानः क्षतहुंकारशंसिनः Ku.2.26; अभिमतफलशंसी चारु पुस्फोर बाहुः Bk.1.27; प्रार्थनासिद्धिशंसिनः R.1.42; Śi.9.77. -4 Presaging, foretelling; बभूव सर्वं शुभशंसि तत्क्षणम् R.3.14; 12.9.
śvāsin श्वासिन् a. [श्वासयति श्वस्-णिच् णिनि] 1 Breathing. -2 Asthmatic. -3 Aspirated (as a sound or letter). -m. 1 Air, wind. -2 A breathing animal, living being. -3 One who pronounces (letters) with a hissing sound.
saṃnyāsin संन्यासिन् m. 1 One who lays down or deposits. -2 One who abandons, gives up; सर्वसंकल्पसंन्यासी योगा- रूढस्तदोच्यते Bg.6.4. -3 One who completely renounces the world and its attachments, an ascetic, a Brāhmaṇa in the fourth order of his religious life; ज्ञेयः स नित्य- संन्यासी यो न द्वेष्टि न काङ्क्षति Bg.5.3. -4 One who abstains from food (त्यक्ताहार); उवाच मारुर्वृद्धे संन्यासिन्यत्र वानरान् Bk.7.76.
sāhasin साहसिन् a. [साहस-इनि] 1 Violent, ferocious; cruel. -2 Bold, daring, rash, impetuous; क्रियाफलमविज्ञाय यतते साहसी च सः.
sraṃsin स्रंसिन् a. (-नी f.) [स्रंस्-णिनि] 1 Falling or slipping down, hanging down, bring loosened, giving way; बन्धे स्रंसिनि चैकहस्तयमिताः पर्याकुला मूर्धजाः Ś.1.29. -2 Depending, pendulous, hanging loosely. -3 Miscarrying.
Macdonell Vedic Search
Results for sin2 results
sindhu síndh-u, m. river, i. 35, 8; ii. 12, 3. 12; Indus, v. 11, 5 [Av. hind-u-s].
vatsin vats-ín, a., f. -ī, accompanied by calves, vii. 103, 2.
Macdonell Search
Results for sin24 results
sina n. (RV.) provision, store.
sindhu m. f. [moving to a goal: √ 2. sidh] stream, river; Indus; m. flood (V.); ocean; region of the Indus, Sindh, people of Sindh (pl.; C.); N. (C.): -gañga, m. N. of a treasury built by a Sindhu;-ga, a. bred in Sindh (horses); n. rock salt; -datta, m. N.; -dvîpa, m. N.; -nada, m. river Indus (also a river in the south); -nâtha, m. (lord of rivers), ocean; -piba, m. ep. of Agastya.
sindhura m. elephant; -râga, m. king of rivers, ocean; king of Sindh; -shena, m. N. of a prince of Sindh; -samgama, m. confluence with the sea, river mouth.
sindūra n. red lead: -tilaka, m. forehead mark made with red lead; i-ta, pp. made to resemble red lead.
sinīvālī f. N. of a goddess of fecundity and easy birth; (goddess of the) day of new moon.
aghaśaṃsin a. confessing guilt.
adhyāsin a. sitting upon.
abhyāsin a. applying oneself to (--°ree;).
avataṃsinī f. woman wearing a wreath.
avidāsin a. unfailing, perennial.
asinva a. insatiable.
udbhāsin a. resplendent with; made visible or indicated by (--°ree;); forthcom ing; -ura, a. blazing.
udvikāsin a. blown (flower).
ekāntavidhvaṃsin a. necessarily perishing; -vihârin, m. solitary wanderer; -sîla, a. retiring into solitude; -hita, pp. thoroughly good.
kālīvilāsin m. husband of Kâlî (Siva).
upasindhu ad. near the Indus.
bisinī f. lotus (nelumbium specio sum: the whole plant): -pattra, n. lotus leaf.
brāhmaṇācchaṃsin m. (re citing after the Brâhmana), priest who assists the Brahman at the Soma sacrifice; -îya, n., -îyâ, f. office of the Brâhmanâkkhamsin; -yã, a. relating to the Brâhmanâkkhamsin priest; n. office of the Brâhmanâkkhamsin.
bhāsin a. (--°ree;) shining; -ura, a. shining, bright, splendid; distinguished by (--°ree;): -ka, m. N.; N. of a lion: -simha, m. id.
sin a. 1. (--°ree;) clothed, dressed in; 2. (gnly. --°ree;) staying, abiding, dwelling, living (in, among, for a time, as); 3. incorr. spelling for vâsin.
viśvāsin a. trusting, confiding; trustworthy; -svâsa½upagama, m. access of confidence; -svâsya, fp. trustworthy; in spiring confidence; to be consoled, finding consolation.
śvāsin a. hissing; asthmatic; aspirated (sound).
samullāsin a. radiant.
svavāsinī f. half-grown girl still living in her own father's house (=su-); -vigraha, m. own body: ac.=oneself; -vi dhi, m.: in. in one's own way; in the right way, duly; -vidheya, fp. to be done by oneself; -vishaya, m. own country, home; own sphere or province: kasmins kit svavi shaye, in some part of his kingdom; (á) vrikti, f. (RV.1) self-appropriation: in. pl. =exclusively for ourselves; -vritti, f. own way of life; own subsistence or existence; independence: in. sg. pl. at the sacrifice of one's own life; -vairitâ, f. hostility towards oneself: niga½âyushah -m kri,=take one's own life; -sakti, f. own power or strength; energy (of a god): in. to the best of one's ability.
Vedic Index of
Names and Subjects
Results for sin24 resultsResults for sin7 results
sindhu In the Rigveda and the Atharvaveda often means 'stream' merely (cf. Sapta Sindhavah), but it has also the more exact sense of ‘the stream’ par excellence, ‘the Indus.’ The name is, however, rarely mentioned after the period of the Samhitās, always then occurring in such a way as to suggest distance. The horses from the Indus (saindhaυa) were famous. See Saindhava. Cf. also Sarasvatī.
sindhu kṣit Is the name of a long-banished but finally restored Rājanyarçi in the Pañcavimśa Brāhmaṇa,1 probably quite a mythical personage.
sinīvālī Denotes the day of new moon and its presiding spirit, which, in accordance with widespread ideas concerning the connexion of the moon and vegetation, is one of fertility and growth. It occurs very frequently from the Rigveda onwards.
antevāsin ‘dwelling near,’ is the epithet of the Brahma- Cārin who lives in the house of his teacher. The expression does not occur before the late Brāhmana period.Secrecy is often enjoined on others than Antevāsins.
āsurivāsin Is a name of Prāśnī-putra in a Vamśa (list of teachers) of the Brhadāranyaka Upanisad
brāhmaṇācchaṃsin (‘Reciting after the Brāhmaṇa — i.e., Brahman ’) is the name of a priest in the Brāhmaṇas. In the technical division of the sacrificial priests (Rtvy) he is classed with the Brahman, but it is clear that he was really a Hotraka or assistant of the Hotṛ. According to Oldenberg, he was known to the Rigveda as Brahman. This is denied by Geldner, who sees in Brahman merely the ‘superintending priest’ or the ‘ priest.’
sapta sindhavaḥ The seven rivers,' occur only once in the Rigveda as the designation of a definite country, while else­where the seven rivers themselves are meant. Max Muller thinks that the five streams of the Panjab, with the Indus and the Sarasvatī, are intended; others4 hold that the Kubhā should be substituted for the Sarasvatī, or that perhaps the Oxus6 must originally have been one of the seven. Zimmer is prob­ably right in laying no stress at all on any identifications; 'seven' being one of the favourite numbers in the Rigveda and later.
Bloomfield Vedic
Concordance
Results for sin24 resultsResults for sin7 results771 results
ā siñcatāpo madhv ā samudre AVP.6.3.13d.
ā siñcatu prajāpatiḥ RV.10.184.1c; AVś.5.25.5c; AVP.12.3.3c; śB.14.9.4.20c; BṛhU.6.4.20c; SMB.1.4.6c; ApMB.1.12.1c; HG.1.25.1c; MG.2.18.2c; JG.1.22c; PG.1.13c (crit. notes; see Speijer, Jātakarma, p. 18).
ā siñca sarpir ghṛtavat samaṅdhi AVś.12.3.45c. P: ā siñca sarpiḥ Kauś.62.17.
ā siñcasva jaṭhare madhva ūrmim RV.3.47.1c; VS.7.38c; VSK.28.10c; TS.1.4.19.1c; MS.1.3.22c: 38.2; KS.4.8c; N.4.8c.
ā siñcodakam ava dhehy enam AVś.9.5.5b. P: ā siñca Kauś.64.12. Fragment: ava dhehi Kauś.64.13.
ā sindhor ā parāvataḥ RV.10.137.2b; AVś.4.13.2b; AVP.5.18.3b; TB.2.4.1.8b; TA.4.42.1b.
abhi ṣiñcāmi nāryāḥ AVP.4.10.7e; 8.10.1e--3e,4f,5d.
abhi ṣiñcāmi mām aham AVś.3.22.6d.
abhi ṣiñcāmi varcasā AVś.4.8.5d; AVP.4.2.6d; KS.36.15d; 37.9d; TB.2.7.7.6d; 15.4d. Cf. abhi tvā varcasā-, abhiṣikto, and abhiṣiñcantu.
abhi ṣiñcāmi vīrudhā AVś.6.136.3d; AVP.1.67.3d.
achā sindhuṃ mātṛtamām ayāsam RV.3.33.3a. Cf. BṛhD.4.107.
adabdhā sindhur apasām apastamā RV.10.75.7c.
adhoakṣāḥ sindhavaḥ srotyābhiḥ RV.3.33.9d.
aditiḥ sindhuḥ pṛthivī uta dyauḥ RV.1.94.16d; 95.11d; 96.9d; 98.3d; 100.19d; 101.11d; 102.11d; 103.8d; 105.19d; 106.7d; 107.3d; 108.13d; 109.8d; 110.9d; 111.5d; 112.25d; 113.20d; 114.11d; 115.6d; 9.97.58d; AVP.4.28.7d; 8.14.11d; 13.6.6d; ArS.1.5d; VS.33.42d; 34.30d; MS.4.12.4d (bis): 187.6,8; 4.14.4d: 220.12; KS.12.14d (bis); AB.1.21.19; TB.2.8.7.2d; TA.4.42.3d; KA.1.218Bd.
agre sindhūnāṃ pavamāno arṣati (SV.JB. arṣasi) RV.9.86.12a; SV.2.383a; JB.3.135a.
āmatrebhiḥ siñcatā madyam andhaḥ RV.2.14.1b; N.5.1.
aṃsatrakośaṃ siñcatā nṛpāṇam RV.10.101.7d; N.5.26d.
anu ṣiñca nas tat kuru AVP.15.15.9a.
astabhnāt sindhum arṇavaṃ nṛcakṣāḥ RV.3.53.9b.
atriṃ śiñjāram aśvinā RV.8.5.25c.
ava sindhuṃ varuṇo dyaur iva sthāt RV.7.87.6a; Aś.3.7.15.
ayaṃ sindhubhyo abhavad u lokakṛt RV.9.86.21b; SV.2.173b.
bhagenābhi ṣiñcatam AVP.2.79.2d.
brahmacārī siñcati sānau retaḥ pṛthivyām AVś.11.5.12c.
dyāvākṣāmā sindhavaś ca svagūrtāḥ RV.1.140.13b.
gharmaṃ siñcād atharvaṇi RV.8.9.7d; AVś.20.140.2d.
gharmāya śinkṣva KA.2.121. See prec. two.
iha siñca tapaso yaj janiṣyate TB.1.2.1.15b; Vait.5.7b; Apś.5.8.5b.
jagatā sindhuṃ divy astabhāyat (AVś. askabhāyat) RV.1.164.25a; AVś.9.10.3a.
jālāṣeṇābhi ṣiñcata AVś.6.57.2a.
jālāṣeṇopa siñcata AVś.6.57.2b.
jāmiḥ sindhūnāṃ bhrāteva svasrām RV.1.65.7a.
juhūbhiḥ siñcatīr iva RV.10.21.3b.
krāṇā sindhūnāṃ kalaśāṃ avīvaśat RV.9.86.19c. See prāṇaḥ etc., and prāṇā etc.
madhumatī sinīvālī AVP.6.6.7a.
madhvaḥ siñcanti harmyasya sakṣaṇim RV.9.71.4b.
madhvaḥ siñcanto adrayaḥ RV.8.53 (Vāl.5).3b.
maṃhiṣṭhaṃ siñca indubhiḥ RV.1.30.1c; SV.1.214c.
mātṝn sindhūn parvatāñ charyaṇāvataḥ RV.10.35.2b.
mitraḥ sindhūnām uta parvatānām RV.3.5.4d.
mṛjanti sindhumātaram (JB. once, -mātaram ihā) RV.9.61.7b; SV.2.431b; JB.3.153 (bis).
mūrdhā sindhūnām uta parvatānām AVP.1.74.2b.
na sindhavo rajaso antam ānaśuḥ RV.1.52.14b.
nāveva sindhuṃ duritāty agniḥ RV.1.99.1d; RVKh.10.127.8d; TA.10.2.1d; MahānU.6.2d; N.7d (Roth's edition, p. 201); 14.33d.
netā sindhūnāṃ vṛṣabha stiyānām RV.7.5.2b.
ni sindhavo vidharmaṇe RV.8.7.5b.
nyak sindhūṃr avāsṛjat RV.8.32.25b.
oṣiṣṭhahanaṃ śiṅgīnikośyābhyām (TA. -kośābhyām) TS.1.4.36.1; TA.3.21.1. See vasiṣṭhahanuḥ.
parīto ṣiñcatā sutam RV.9.107.1a; SV.1.512a; 2.663a; VS.19.2a; MS.3.11.7a: 149.18; KS.37.18a; JB.2.421; 3.252a; PB.15.3.3; śB.12.8.2.12; TB.2.6.1.1a; Apś.19.5.11; Mś.5.2.11.4; Svidh.1.4.3; 7.9. P: parīto ṣiñcata Kś.19.1.22.
paścāt sindhur vidhāraṇī VāDh.1.15a. Cf. sindhuḥ paścāt.
patiḥ sindhūnāṃ bhavan RV.9.15.5c; SV.2.620c.
patiḥ sindhūnām asi revatīnām RV.10.180.1d; TS.3.4.11.4d; MS.4.12.3d: 184.16; KS.38.7d; TB.2.6.9.1d; 3.5.7.4d.
pra sindhavo javasā cakramanta RV.4.22.6d.
pra sindhubhyaḥ pra giribhyo mahitvā RV.1.109.6c; TS.4.2.11.1c; MS.4.10.4c: 152.16; KS.4.15c.
pra sindhubhyo riricāno mahitvā RV.10.89.1d.
pra sindhubhyo ririce pra kṣitibhyaḥ RV.10.89.11d.
pra sindhum achā bṛhatī manīṣā RV.3.33.5c; N.2.25c.
prajāpatiḥ siñcatu reto asyām AVP.5.37.5b.
prāṇā sindhunāṃ kalaśāṃ acikradat SV.1.559c; 2.171c. See under krāṇā si-.
prāṇaḥ sindhūnāṃ kalaśāṃ acikradat AVś.18.4.58c. See under krāṇā si-.
purūvṛtaḥ sindhusṛtyāya jātāḥ AVś.10.2.11b.
ṛtaṃ sindhavo varuṇasya yanti RV.2.28.4b.
taṃ sindhavo matsaram indrapānam RV.10.30.9a.
tat sindhava iṣayanto anu gman RV.5.49.4b.
tatrā siñcasva vṛṣṇyam AVP.5.12.5c.
tatṛdānāḥ sindhavaḥ kṣodasā rajaḥ RV.5.53.7a.
te sindhavo varivo dhātanā naḥ RV.7.47.4c.
tīrthe sindhūnāṃ rathaḥ RV.1.46.8b.
tīrthe sindhor adhi svare RV.8.72.7c.
tvaṃ sindhūṃr avāsṛjaḥ RV.10.133.2a; AVś.20.95.3a; SV.2.1152a.
tvaṃ sindhūṃr asṛjas tastabhānān RV.8.96.18c.
tvaṃ sindho kubhayā gomatīṃ krumum RV.10.75.6c.
udriṇaṃ siñce akṣitam RV.10.101.6c; TS.4.2.5.5c.
upa sindhavaḥ pradivi kṣaranti RV.5.62.4d.
ut siñcanti punanti ca VS.20.28b.
uta sindhuṃ vibālyam RV.4.30.12a.
uta sindhūṃr aharvidā RV.8.5.21b.
yābhiḥ sindhum atara indra pūrbhit RV.10.104.8b.
yābhiḥ sindhum avatha yābhis tūrvatha RV.8.20.24a.
yābhiḥ sindhuṃ madhumantam asaścatam RV.1.112.9a.
yaḥ sindhūnām upodaye RV.8.41.2d; N.10.5d.
yasyendrasya sindhavaḥ saścati vratam RV.1.101.3c.
yat sindhau yad asiknyām RV.8.20.25a.
yathā sindhur nadīnām AVś.14.1.43a. P: yathā sindhuḥ Kauś.75.27.
yuvaṃ siñjāram uśanām upārathuḥ RV.10.40.7b.
yuvaṃ sindhūṃr abhiśaster avadyāt RV.1.93.5c; TS.2.3.14.2c; MS.1.5.1 (only in Padap.; see p. 65, note 6); 4.10.1c: 144.15; KS.4.16c; AB.2.9.5c; TB.3.5.7.3c; Kauś.5.1c.
akāmā vo dakṣiṇāṃ na nīnima # TS.3.2.8.3c.
akośāḥ kośinīś ca yāḥ # KS.16.13b. See under next.
akośā yāś ca kośinīḥ (AVP. keśinīḥ) # AVP.11.7.6b; MS.2.7.13b: 94.11; PrāṇāgU.1b (var. lect.). See prec., and apuṣpā.
akṣāsa id aṅkuśino nitodinaḥ # RV.10.34.7a.
agnayo na śuśucānā ṛjīṣiṇaḥ # RV.2.34.1c; TB.2.5.5.4c.
agniṃ dhībhir manīṣiṇaḥ # RV.8.43.19a.
agnim adya hotāram (commentary continues avṛṇītām imau yajamānau pacantau paktīḥ pacantau purolāśaṃ badhnantāv agnīṣomābhyāṃ chāgam [dviyajamānake]; and avṛṇateme yajamānāḥ pacantaḥ paktīḥ pacantaḥ purolāśaṃ badhnanto 'gnīṣomābhyāṃ chāgam [bahuyajamānake]. The version of the formula [comm. sūktavākapraiṣa: cf. Aś.3.6.16] in the singular does not seem to be mentioned) # śś.5.20.5. Cf. the prec. six.
agnir viśāṃ mānuṣīṇām # TB.2.4.8.2b. See viśām agnir.
agne akṣīṇi (HG. agneyakṣīṇi) nir daha svāhā # ApMB.2.14.2c; HG.2.3.7c.
agneyakṣīṇi # see agne akṣīṇi.
agne virapśinaṃ (AVP. virapsinaṃ) medhyam # AVś.5.29.13c; AVP.12.19.7c.
agneṣ ṭvā (KS.Apś. agnes tvā) tejasā sādayāmi # VS.13.13; MS.2.7.15: 98.1; KS.16.15; śB.7.4.1.41; Apś.16.22.5; Mś.6.1.7.6. P: agneṣ ṭvā Kś.17.4.12. Cf. agnes tvā tejasābhi ṣiñcāmi.
agnes tejasā sūryasya varcasendrasyendriyeṇa mitrāvaruṇayor vīryeṇa marutām ojasā (abhiṣiñcāmi) # TB.1.7.8.4. Cf. agnes tvā tejasābhiṣiñcāmi, and see under prec.
agnes tejasā sūryasya varcasendrasyendriyeṇābhiṣiñcāmi # AB.8.7.5,7,9. Cf. prec.
agnes tvā tejasābhiṣiñcāmi # TB.1.7.8.3. Cf. agnes tejasā ... abhiṣiñcāmi.
agnes tvā sāmrājyenābhi ṣiñcāmi # TS.1.7.10.3; 5.6.3.3; TB.1.3.8.3; Apś.17.19.8. See agneḥ sām-.
agneḥ sāmrājyenābhi ṣiñcāmi # VS.18.37; śB.9.3.4.17. See agnes tvā sām-.
aghnyāś carmavāsinīḥ # AVP.2.33.5b.
aṅgiraso manīṣiṇaḥ # AVś.11.6.13c; AVP.15.14.6c.
ajaṃ pañcaudanaṃ dakṣiṇājyotiṣaṃ dadat # AVP.8.19.11cd. See yo 'jaṃ pañcaudanaṃ.
añjanti yaṃ dakṣiṇato havirbhiḥ # RV.1.95.6d; AVP.8.14.6d.
athā naraḥ prayatadakṣiṇāsaḥ # RV.10.107.3c.
atho bastābhivāśinaḥ # AVś.11.9.22d. Cf. arāyān bastavāśinaḥ.
adabdhasya svayaśaso virapśinaḥ # RV.10.75.9d.
adha kṣaranti sindhavo na sṛṣṭāḥ # RV.1.72.10c.
adhvaryav ā tu hi ṣiñca # RV.8.32.24a.
adhvā rajāṃsīndriyam # VS.20.56c. See madhvā etc.
anayainaṃ mekhalayā sināmi # AVś.6.133.3d; AVP.5.33.3d.
anavahāyāsmān devi dakṣiṇe devayānena pathā yatī sukṛtāṃ loke sīda # KS.4.9. See prec.
anānatā avithurā ṛjīṣiṇaḥ # RV.1.87.1b.
anūnā yasya dakṣiṇā pīpāya # RV.7.27.4c.
anena ca tvābhiṣiñcāmy anena ca # śB.9.3.2.5.
antaḥ putraś carati dakṣiṇāyāḥ # RV.3.58.1b.
antarikṣaṃ sam asmān siñcatu # AVP.6.18.5c.
antarhitā ma rṣayaḥ pracetasaḥ # AVP.13.1.7a. The word antarhitā is missing in all mss.
anne vicṛttā bahudhā sinanti # AVP.5.36.2b.
apa indro dakṣiṇatas turāṣāṭ # RV.6.32.5b.
apakṣāḥ pakṣiṇaś ca ye # AVś.11.5.21c.
apāṃ ya ūrmau rasas tenāham imam amum āmuṣyāyaṇam amuṣyāḥ putram ojase kṣatrāyābhiṣiñcāmi # KS.36.15.
apāṃ yā yajñiyā tanūs tayāham imam amum āmuṣyāyaṇam amuṣyāḥ putram āyuṣe dīrghāyutvāyābhiṣiñcāmi # KS.36.15.
apāṃ yo dravaṇe rasas tenāham imam amum āmuṣyāyaṇam amuṣyāḥ putraṃ tejase brahmavarcasāyābhiṣiñcāmi # KS.36.15.
apāṃ yo madhye rasas tenāham imam amum āmuṣyāyaṇam amuṣyāḥ putraṃ prajāyai puṣṭyā abhiṣiñcāmi # KS.36.5.
apāṃ napāt sindhavaḥ sapta pātana # AVś.6.3.1c.
apām ūrmiṃ sacate sindhuṣu śritaḥ # RV.9.86.8b.
apām ūrmau sindhuṣv antar ukṣitaḥ # RV.9.72.7b.
apāsya ye sināḥ pāśāḥ # KS.38.13c; Apś.16.16.1c. See apāsyāḥ satvanaḥ.
apo niṣiñcann asuraḥ pitā naḥ # RV.5.83.6d; AVś.4.15.12a; AVP.5.7.10e; TS.3.1.11.7d; KS.11.13d.
apsu tvā hastair duduhur manīṣiṇaḥ # RV.9.79.4d.
apsv āsīn mātariśvā praviṣṭaḥ # AVś.10.8.40a.
abhi tvā varcasāsiñcan (AVP.KSṭB. -sicam, but AVP.4.2.7a, varcasā sicam) # AVś.4.8.6a; AVP.4.2.7a; 8.10.10a; KS.36.15a; 37.9a; TB.2.7.15.4a. Cf. under abhi ṣiñcāmi varcasā.
abhi tvā sindho śiśum in na mātaraḥ # RV.10.75.4a.
abhi prehi dakṣiṇato bhavā me (AVś.AVP. naḥ) # RV.10.83.7a; AVś.4.32.7a; AVP.4.32.7a.
abhi brahmāṇi cakṣāthe ṛṣīṇām # RV.7.70.5b.
abhi vāṇīr ṛṣīṇāṃ sapta (SV. saptā) nūṣata # RV.9.103.3c; SV.1.577c.
abhiṣikto 'bhi (AVP. abhi) mā siñca varcasā # AVś.19.31.12b; AVP.10.5.12b. Cf. under abhi ṣiñcāmi varcasā.
abhiṣiñcantu varcasā # Mś.1.6.2.17d. Cf. under abhi ṣiñcāmi varcasā.
abhi srucaḥ kramate dakṣiṇāvṛtaḥ # RV.1.144.1c.
abhi svaranti bahavo manīṣiṇaḥ # RV.9.85.3c.
abhūd u vasvī dakṣiṇā maghonī # RV.6.64.1d.
amatrebhir ṛjīṣiṇam # RV.6.42.2c; SV.2.791c.
ayaṃ sa śiṅkte (AVś. śiṅte) yena gaur abhīvṛtā # RV.1.164.29a; AVś.9.10.7a; JB.2.265a; N.2.9a.
ayad adhvaryur haviṣāva sindhum # RV.5.37.2d.
ayaṃ dakṣiṇā viśvakarmā # VS.13.55; 15.16; TS.4.3.2.1; 4.3.1; 5.2.10.4; MS.2.7.19: 104.3; 2.8.10: 114.16; KS.16.19; 17.9; 20.9; śB.8.1.1.7; 4.2; 6.1.17.
arāyān bastavāśinaḥ # AVś.8.6.12c. Cf. atho bastābhivāśinaḥ.
arbhasya tṛpradaṃśinaḥ # AVś.7.56.3c.
alaṃ yajñāyota dakṣiṇāyai # AVP.1.96.2b; KS.40.5b; Apś.16.34.4b.
ava kranda dakṣiṇato gṛhāṇām # RV.2.42.3a.
ava dhehi # Kauś.64.13. Fragment of, ā siñcodakam ava etc., q.v.
avantu mā sindhavaḥ pinvamānāḥ # RV.6.52.4b.
avantu sapta sindhavaḥ # RV.8.54 (Vāl.6).4b.
avaśān vaśiny asi rājñī # SMB.1.1.3d.
avasyavo vṛṣaṇaṃ vajradakṣiṇam # RV.1.101.1c; SV.1.380c.
avāyantāṃ pakṣiṇo ye vayāṃsi # AVś.11.10.8a.
avāsṛjat sartave sapta sindhūn # RV.2.12.12b; AVś.20.34.13b; AVP.12.15.3b; JUB.1.29.7b,9. Cf. next but one.
avāsṛjaḥ sartave sapta sindhūn # RV.1.32.12d; AVP.12.13.2d. Cf. prec. but one.
avāsrāg dīkṣā (AVP. dīkṣāṃ) vaśinī hy ugrā # AVP.2.52.5b; TB.2.7.17.1b.
avīvaśanta matibhir manīṣiṇaḥ # RV.10.64.15d.
avyo vāreṣu siñcata # RV.9.63.10c,19b.
aśmavarma me 'si yo mā prācyā diśo (2, mā dakṣiṇāyā diśo; 3, mā pratīcyā diśo; 4, modīcyā diśo; 5, mā dhruvāyā diśo; 6, mordhvāyā diśo; 7, mā diśām antardeśebhyo) 'ghāyur abhidāsāt # AVś.5.10.1--7. P: aśmavarma me Vait.29.11; Kauś.51.14. See prec. and yo 'smān prācyā (dakṣiṇāyā, pratīcyā, udīcyā, dhruvāyā, ūrdhvāyā: AVP.6.12.8--10 and 6.13.1--3), and cf. idam ahaṃ yo mā prācyā (dakṣiṇāyā etc.) diśo etc. (Kauś.49.7--9), and AVś.4.40.
aśva ivātti śinī naḍam # AVP.11.10.5d.
aśvatthaś ca savāsinau # AVP.9.29.2b.
aśvinor bhaiṣajyena tejase brahmavarcasāyābhiṣiñcāmi # VS.20.3; TB.2.6.5.2; Apś.19.9.13. See next.
aśvinos tvā tejasā brahmavarcasāyābhiṣiñcāmi # MS.3.11.8: 151.13. See prec.
aṣāḍhāya prasakṣiṇe # RV.8.32.27b.
asaś ca tvaṃ dakṣiṇataḥ sakhā me # RV.8.100.2c.
asmabhyam asya dakṣiṇā duhīta # RV.2.18.8b.
asmāt syandante sindhavaḥ sarvarūpāḥ # TA.10.10.1b; MahānU.8.5b; MuṇḍU.2.1.9b.
asmān hotrā bhāratī dakṣiṇābhiḥ # RV.3.62.3d.
asmiṃl loke dakṣiṇayā pariṣkṛtam # AVP.6.22.13d.
asmin goṣṭhe karīṣiṇīḥ (Kauś. -ṇaḥ; MS. purīṣiṇīḥ) # AVś.3.14.3b; AVP.2.13.5b; MS.4.2.10b: 33.3; Kauś.89.12b. See next.
asmin dhehi tanūvaśin # AVś.4.4.4d. Cf. asmai dhehi tanūbalam, and tān asmin etc.
asmin rāṣṭram adadhur dakṣiṇāvat # AVP.14.2.4b.
asme prayandhi maghavann ṛjīṣin # RV.3.36.10a; AG.1.15.3; PG.1.18.5a; N.6.7. See asmai etc.
asme retaḥ siñcataṃ yan manurhitam # RV.6.70.2d.
asmai dhehi tanūbalam # AVP.4.5.7d. Cf. under asmin dhehi tanūvaśin.
asmai prayandhi maghavann ṛjīṣin # KBU.2.11. See asme etc.
asyāṃ tvā dhruvāyāṃ madhyamāyāṃ pratiṣṭhāyāṃ diśi sādhyāś cāptyāś ca devāḥ ṣaḍbhiś caiva pañcaviṃśair ahobhir abhiṣiñcantv etena ca tṛcenaitena ca yajuṣaitābhiś ca vyāhṛtibhī rājyāya māhārājyādhipatyāya svāvaśyāyādhiṣṭhāya # AB.8.19.1.
asyāṃ me dakṣiṇasyāṃ diśi yamaś ca mṛtyuś cādhipatī yamaś ca mṛtyuś ca maitasyai diśaḥ pātāṃ yamaṃ ca mṛtyuṃ ca sa devatānām ṛchatu yo no 'to 'bhidāsati # śś.6.3.2. Cf. ye dakṣiṇato juhvati.
asyed u tveṣasā ranta sindhavaḥ # RV.1.61.11a; AVś.20.35.11a.
asvapnaś ca mānavadrāṇaś cottarato gopāyetām (KSṃG. ca dakṣiṇato gopāyatām) # KS.37.10; PG.3.4.17; MG.2.15.1. See under prec.
ahaṃ viśvā oṣadhīḥ sapta sindhūn # KS.40.9b.
ahann ahim ariṇāt sapta sindhūn # RV.4.28.1c; 10.67.12c; AVś.20.91.12c; MS.4.11.2c: 164.8; KS.9.19c. Cf. yo hatvāhim.
aham ṛtūṃr ajanayaṃ sapta sindhūn # AVś.6.61.3b.
ahar vai gopāyamānaṃ rātrī rakṣamāṇā te prapadye tābhyāṃ namo 'stu te mā dakṣiṇato gopāyetām # PG.3.4.15.
ā gharme (Aś. gharmaṃ) siñca paya usriyāyāḥ # AVś.7.73.6b; Aś.4.7.4b; śś.5.10.10b. The printed text of śś. (o ṣu) mā gharme etc.
ā gharme siñcasva # Mś.4.3.15.
āghoṣiṇyaḥ pratighoṣiṇyaḥ saṃghoṣiṇyo vicinvatyaḥ śvasanāḥ kravyāda eṣa vo bhāgas taṃ juṣadhvaṃ svāhā # śś.4.19.8.
āṅgūṣāṇām avāvaśanta vāṇīḥ # RV.9.90.2b. See aṅgoṣiṇam etc.
āṅgūṣyaṃ pavamānaṃ sakhāyaḥ # RV.9.97.8c. See aṅgoṣiṇaṃ etc.
ācyā jānu dakṣiṇato niṣadya # RV.10.15.6a; AVś.18.1.52a; VS.19.62a. P: ācyā jānu Kauś.83.28.
ā tū ṣiñca kaṇvamantam # RV.8.2.22a.
ā tū ṣiñca harim īṃ dror upasthe # RV.10.101.10a; N.4.19.
ā te siñcāmi kukṣyoḥ # RV.8.17.5a; AVś.20.4.2a.
ātmanvatīṃ dakṣiṇām # AVP.7.15.2c.
ātmanvantaṃ pakṣiṇaṃ taugryāya kam # RV.1.182.5b.
ā dakṣiṇā sṛjyate śuṣmy āsadam # RV.9.71.1a.
ādatta yajñaṃ kāśīnām # śB.13.5.4.21c.
ādityā ājyaiḥ # MS.1.9.2: 132.2; KS.9.10. Cf. ādityā dakṣiṇābhiḥ.
ādityā dakṣiṇābhiḥ # TA.3.8.2. Cf. ādityā ājyaiḥ.
ādityās tvā paścād abhiṣiñcantu jāgatena chandasā # TB.2.7.15.5.
ādityā ha jaritar aṅgirobhyo dakṣiṇām (JB.śś. 'śvaṃ dakṣiṇām) anayan # AVś.20.135.6; AB.6.35.5; GB.2.6.14 (bis); JB.2.116ab; Aś.8.3.25; śś.12.19.1. P: ādityā ha jaritaḥ Vait.32.28. Seems to be pādas a, b, of a stanza. AVś.20.135.6--10 are designated as devanītham AB.6.34.1 ff.; as ādityāṅgirasyaḥ (sc. ṛcaḥ) KB.30.6; śś.12.19.5.
ād dakṣiṇā yujyate vājayantī # RV.5.1.3c; SV.2.1098c.
ā na etu dakṣiṇā viśvarūpā # AVP.7.15.10c. See sā na aitu dakṣiṇā.
ā nāryasya dakṣiṇā # RV.8.24.29a.
ā no diva ā pṛthivyā ṛjīṣin # RV.7.24.3a.
ā no bhara dakṣiṇena # RV.8.81.6a; śś.7.15.3.
āpa iva kāśinā saṃgṛbhītāḥ # RV.7.104.8c; AVś.8.4.8c.
āpaṃ tvāgne dakṣiṇābhiḥ # TS.5.5.7.5.
āpākesthāḥ prahāsinaḥ # AVś.8.6.14c.
āpo arṣanti sindhavaḥ # RV.9.2.4b; 66.13b; SV.2.390b; JB.3.137b.
āpo na sindhum abhi yat samakṣaran # RV.10.43.7a; AVś.20.17.7d.
āpo me hotrāśaṃsinaḥ (AG. -śaṃsinyaḥ) # ṣB.2.10; Apś.10.1.14; AG.1.23.12.
āpo me hotrāśaṃsinas te me devayajanaṃ dadātu (!) hotrāśaṃsino devayajanaṃ me datta # ṣB.2.10. See āpo hotrāśaṃsinas.
āpo me hotrāśaṃsinas te mopahvayantām # ṣB.2.5.
āpo 'si janmanā vaśā sā yajñaṃ garbham adhatthāḥ sā mayā saṃbhava # MS.2.13.15: 164.5. Cf. Apś.16.32.4, and dakṣiṇā vaśā.
āpo hi ṣṭhā mayobhuvaḥ # RV.10.9.1a; AVś.1.5.1a; SV.2.1187a; VS.11.50a; 36.14a; TS.4.1.5.1a; 5.6.1.4a; 7.4.19.4a; MS.2.7.5a: 79.16; 3.1.6: 8.10; 4.9.27a: 139.3; KS.16.4a; 19.5; 35.3a; śB.6.5.1.2; TB.3.9.7.5; TA.4.42.4a; 10.1.11a; KA.1.219a; 3.219; Apś.7.21.6; 9.12.2; 18.8; 13.15.13; 14.18.1; 16.4.1; AG.2.8.12; 9.8; 4.6.14; Kauś.6.17; HG.1.10.2; 21.5; 2.18.9; MG.1.2.11; ApMB.2.7.13a (ApG.5.12.6); BDh.2.5.8.11; LVyāsaDh.2.19; N.9.27a. P: āpo hi ṣṭhā MS.2.13.1: 153.4; KSA.4.8; Aś.5.20.6; śś.4.11.6; 15.3; 8.6.7; 7.12,20; 9.28.6; 14.57.7; Vait.28.11; Kś.16.3.16; Mś.4.3.43; 6.1.2.2; 6.1.6.19 (20); PG.1.8.6; 2.2.14; 6.13; 14.21; 3.5.4; VārG.9.9; ViDh.64.18; 65.3; GDh.26.10; ParDh.11.34; 12.10; LVyāsaDh.1.22; VHDh.8.25; BṛhPDh.2.38,50,56,129; Rvidh.1.3.5; 4.10; 3.4.3,6. Designated as āpo-hi-ṣṭhīyam (sc. sūktam) śG.3.1.4; āpo-hi-ṣṭhāḥ (sc. ṛcaḥ) VāDh.15.20; VHDh.4.30; āpo-hi-ṣṭhīyāḥ (sc. ṛcaḥ) śś.4.11.6; 21.5; 8.6.7; 7.12,20; 14.57.7; Lś.2.10.20; 3.6.6; 4.11.7; Apś.15.11.16; 20.18.7; śG.1.14.8; MG.1.1.24; 6.4; 11.26; 2.2.27; Svidh.1.2.5. This and the next hymn of AVś. (1.6.1) are designated as śaṃbhumayobhū (sc. sūkte) Vait.10.19; Kauś.9.1,4; 18.25; 19.1; 41.14; 43.12; this hymn alone as sindhudvīpasya sūktam Rvidh.3.11.4. Cf. BṛhD.6.153. See abdaivatam.
āpo hotrāśaṃsinas te me hotrāśaṃsino hotrāśaṃsino devayajanaṃ me datta # Apś.10.3.1. See āpo me hotrāśaṃsinas te me devayajanaṃ.
ā pyāyatāṃ papurir dakṣiṇayā # AVP.1.46.4a.
ā pyāyate papurir dakṣiṇayā # AVP.1.46.3d.
ā pra yacha dakṣiṇād ota savyāt # AVś.7.26.8d; VS.5.19d; TS.1.2.13.2d; 7.13.4d; MS.1.2.9d: 19.7; KS.2.10d; śB.3.5.3.22d.
ārtiṃ puruṣareṣiṇīm # Kauś.58.1b.
ā vām ṛtāya keśinīr anūṣata # RV.1.151.6a.
ā vipram ā manīṣiṇam # RV.9.65.29b; SV.2.488b; JB.3.95b.
ā śāsate manīṣiṇaḥ # RV.9.99.5d.
āśā sam asmān siñcatu # AVP.6.18.6c.
ā śyenāso na pakṣiṇo vṛthā naraḥ # RV.8.20.10c.
āsā vahniṃ na śociṣā virapśinam # RV.10.115.3c.
āsīna ūrdhvām upasi kṣiṇāti # RV.10.27.13c; N.6.6.
āsīnā mṛtyuṃ nudatā sadhasthe # AVś.12.2.30c. P: āsīnāḥ Kauś.72.10.
ā sute siñcata śriyam # RV.8.72.13a; SV.2.830a; VS.33.21a; AB.1.22.2; KB.8.7; Aś.4.7.4; śś.5.10.11.
ā sotā pari ṣiñcata # RV.9.108.7a; SV.1.580a; 2.744a; JB.3.51; PB.12.5.3.
āste bhaga āsīnasya # AB.7.15.3a; śś.15.19a.
āsmai rīyante nivaneva sindhavaḥ # RV.10.40.9c.
iḍā sam asmān siñcatu # AVP.6.19.2c.
ittham eke dakṣiṇā pratyañcaḥ # AVP.13.8.5b.
idaṃ candram imāś ca bhavate dakṣiṇā dadāmi # Mś.2.4.5.14.
idaṃ tṛtīyaṃ vaśinī vaśāśi # AVP.12.9.5a.
idam ahaṃ yo mā prācyā (also dakṣiṇāyā, pratīcyā, etc.) diśo 'ghāyur abhidāsād apavādīd iṣūguhaḥ tasyemau prāṇāpānāv apakrāmāmi brahmaṇā # Kauś.49.7--8. Cf. AVś.4.40; 5.10.
idam aham amum āmuṣyāyaṇam amuṣya putram amuṣyāḥ putraṃ kāmāya dakṣiṇāṃ nayāmi # Kś.12.2.18.
idam aham amum āmuṣyāyaṇam amuṣya putraṃ prakṣiṇāmi # KS.21.7. See idam aham amuṣyāmuṣyāyaṇam.
idam aham amuṣyāmuṣyāyaṇam amuṣmāt putram amuṣyāṃ diśi prakṣiṇāmi # MS.3.3.5: 37.18. See idam aham amum āmuṣyāyaṇam amuṣya putraṃ prakṣiṇāmi.
idam aham amuṣyāmuṣyāyaṇasyāyuḥ prakṣiṇomi # Apś.17.12.6.
idam ahaṃ māṃ kalyāṇyai kīrtyai tejase yaśase 'mṛtatvāyātmānaṃ dakṣiṇāṃ nayāni # Aś.5.13.12. See next.
idam ahaṃ māṃ kalyāṇyai kīrtyai svargāya lokāyāmṛtatvāya (Apś. lokāya) dakṣiṇāṃ (Mś. -ṇaṃ !) nayāni (Apś. nayāmi; Mś. dadāmi) # KB.15.1; śś.13.14.6; Apś.21.5.10; Mś.7.2.1.48. See prec.
indraṃ sāmrājyāyābhiṣiñcāmi # MS.1.11.4: 165.8; 3.4.3: 47.10. P: indraṃ sāmrājyāya Mś.6.2.5.31 (ūha of bṛhaspatiṃ sāmrājyāya in devasya tvā ... hastābhyāṃ sarasvatyā vācā yantur yantreṇa ...). Cf. indrasya tvā sām-, and indrasya bṛhaspates.
indra kṣitīnām asi mānuṣīṇām # RV.3.34.2c; AVś.20.11.2c.
indram it keśinā harī # RV.8.14.12a; AVś.20.29.2a.
indra ṣoḍaśinn ojasviṃs (read ojasvī) tvaṃ (Vait. ṣoḍaśinn ojaḥ saṃsthaṃ, read ṣoḍaśinn ojasvāṃs tvaṃ) deveṣv asi # Aś.6.3.22; Vait.25.14. See the items under indrauj-.
indras tvā rudrair dakṣiṇato rocayatu traiṣṭubhena chandasā # TA.4.6.1; 5.5.1.
indrasya tvā sāmrājyenābhi ṣiñcāmi # VSK.10.5.8; TS.5.6.3.3; TB.1.3.8.3. P: indrasya Apś.17.19.8. Cf. under indraṃ sām-, and next but three.
indrasya tvendriyeṇaujase balāyābhi ṣiñcāmi # MS.3.11.8: 151.14. Cf. prec. but three.
indrasya bāhur asi dakṣiṇaḥ sahasrabhṛṣṭiḥ śatatejāḥ # VS.1.24; TS.1.1.9.1; MS.1.1.10: 5.12; KS.1.9; 31.8; śB.1.2.4.6; TB.3.2.9.1. Ps: indrasya bāhur asi dakṣiṇaḥ TS.1.1.11.1; MS.1.1.12: 7.11; TB.3.3.6.9; Apś.2.1.1; indrasya bāhur asi Mś.1.2.4.7; 1.2.6.8; indrasya bāhuḥ Kś.2.6.13. Fragment: sahasrabhṛṣṭiḥ śatatejāḥ MS.4.1.10: 12.14.
indrasya bāhur asi dakṣiṇo viśvasyāriṣṭyai (KS. dakṣiṇo yajamānasya paridhiḥ) # VS.2.3; KS.1.11; śB.1.3.4.3.
indrasya bṛhaspates tvā sāmrājyenābhi ṣiñcāmi # TS.1.7.10.3. Cf. under indraṃ sām-, and bṛhaspateṣ ṭvā.
indrasya yāhi prasave manojavāḥ # AVś.6.92.1b. See indrasyeva dakṣiṇaḥ.
indrasya va indriyeṇābhi ṣiñcet # AVś.16.1.9.
indrasyātra taviṣībhyo virapśinaḥ # RV.10.113.6a.
indrasyendriyeṇa balāya śriyai yaśase 'bhi (TB. -yeṇa śriyai yaśase balāyābhi) ṣiñcāmi # VS.20.3; TB.2.6.5.3. Ps: indrasyendriyeṇa TB.1.7.8.4; indrasya Kś.19.4.14.
indrasyeva dakṣiṇaḥ śriyaidhi # VS.9.8b; śB.5.1.4.9. See indrasya yāhi prasave.
indrasyorum ā viśa dakṣiṇam uśann uśantaṃ syonaḥ syonam # VS.4.27; TS.1.2.7.1; MS.1.2.6: 15.2; KS.2.6; śB.3.3.3.10. Ps: indrasyorum ā viśa dakṣiṇam TS.6.1.11.1; MS.3.78: 86.1; KS.24.6; indrasyorum ā viśa Apś.10.27.3; Mś.2.1.4.18; indrasyorum Kś.7.8.23.
indraḥ sam asmān siñcatu # AVP.6.18.2c.
indrāgnyor dhenur dakṣiṇāyām uttaravedyāḥ śroṇyām āsannā # KS.34.15.
indrā bhara dakṣiṇenā vasūni # RV.10.180.1c; TS.3.4.11.4c; MS.4.12.3c: 184.16; KS.38.7c; TB.2.6.9.1c; 3.5.7.4c.
indrāya tvā ṣoḍaśine (VSK. ṣolaśine) # VS.8.33 (bis),34 (bis),35 (bis); VSK.8.8.1 (bis); 9.1 (bis); 10.1 (bis); 11--1 (bis); 28.11 (bis); TS.1.4.37.1 (bis); 38.1 (bis); 39.1 (bis); 40.1 (bis); 41.1 (bis); 42.1 (bis); śB.4.5.3.9 (bis),10 (bis). See indrāya tvā hari-.
indrotibhir bahulābhir no adya # RV.3.53.21a; AVś.7.31.1a. P: indrotibhiḥ Kauś.48.37. Designated as vasiṣṭhadveṣiṇyaḥ (sc. ṛcaḥ) Rvidh.2.4.2; as vāsiṣṭhaṃ tṛcam LAtDh.2.4; VAtDh.2.4.
indro dyāvāpṛthivī sindhur adbhiḥ # RV.4.54.6c.
indro brahmā dakṣiṇatas te astu # AVś.18.4.15b.
indro mahāṃ sindhum āśayānam # RV.2.11.9a.
indro rakṣatu dakṣiṇato marutvān # AVś.12.3.24b.
indraujaskāraujasvāṃs tvaṃ sahasvān deveṣv edhi # MS.4.7.3: 96.11. P: indraujaskāra Mś.7.2.2.21. See next two, and indra ṣoḍaśinn.
imaṃ dhiṣṇyam udakumbhaṃ ca triḥ pradakṣiṇaṃ parivrajātha dakṣiṇaiḥ pāṇibhir dakṣiṇān ūrūn āghnānā ehy evā3 idaṃ madhū3 idaṃ madhv iti vadatyaḥ # ā.5.1.1.28.
imā ūrū savāsinau # AVP.1.112.1a.
imām erakāṃ dakṣiṇena pādenābhijahi # JG.1.20.
imau pādāv avaniktau # Kauś.90.11a. Cf. dakṣiṇaṃ (and savyaṃ) pādam avanenije.
iṣam ūrjaṃ dakṣiṇāḥ (AVP.7.15.9b, dakṣiṇāṃ) saṃvasānāḥ # AVP.5.31.8c; AVP.7.15.9b. Cf. iṣam ūrjam abhi saṃvasānau.
iṣam ūrjam abhi saṃvasānau # VS.12.57c; TS.4.2.5.1c; MS.2.7.11c: 90.6; KS.16.11c; śB.12.4.3.4c; ApMB.1.3.14c. Cf. iṣam ūrjaṃ dakṣiṇāḥ.
iṣṭāpūrtam anusaṃkrāma vidvān (TA. anusaṃpaśya dakṣiṇām) # AVś.18.2.57c; AVP.2.60.5c; TA.6.1.1c.
ihaiva kṣemya edhi mā prahāsīr (Apś. -hāsīn) mām amum āmuṣyāyaṇam (Aś. prahāsīr amuṃ māmuṣyāyaṇam; Apś. māmum āmuṣyāyaṇam) # MS.1.8.9: 128.16; Aś.3.12.7; Apś.9.7.6; Mś.3.3.6 (7).
ihaiva sā carati kṣīṇapuṇyā # ApDh.2.7.17.8c.
iho sahasradakṣiṇaḥ (PG. -dakṣiṇo yajñaḥ) # AVś.20.127.12c; KS.35.3c; AB.8.11.5c; śś.8.11.15c; 12.15.1.3c; Lś.3.3.2c; Apś.9.17.1c; SMB.1.3.13c; PG.1.8.10c; ApMB.1.9.1c; HG.1.22.9c; JG.1.22c.
īśe hy asya mahato virapśin # ArS.4.11b.
ugrasya cid damitā vīḍuharṣiṇaḥ # RV.2.23.11d.
ugrām ā tiṣṭha # TS.1.8.13.1; MS.2.6.10: 69.14; KS.15.7; TB.1.7.7.2. See dakṣiṇām ā roha.
uccā divi dakṣiṇāvanto asthuḥ # RV.10.107.2a. P: uccā divi śG.2.12.16.
ucchiṣṭe ghoṣiṇīr āpaḥ # AVś.11.7.20c.
uta tyaṃ vīraṃ dhanasām ṛjīṣiṇam # RV.8.86.4a.
uta naḥ sindhur apām # RV.8.25.14a.
uta srutiṃ vindaty añjasīnām # RV.10.32.7d.
uta hanti pūrvāsinam # AVś.10.1.27a.
ut pātayati pakṣiṇaḥ # RV.1.48.5d.
udīcyāṃ tvā diśi viśve devāḥ ṣaḍbhiś caiva pañcaviṃśair ahobhir abhiṣiñcantv etena ca tṛceṇaitena ca yajuṣaitābhiś ca vyāhṛtibhir vairājyāya # AB.8.19.1. Cf. viśve devā udīcyāṃ.
udīrāṇā utāsīnāḥ # AVś.12.1.28a. P: udīrāṇāḥ Kauś.24.33.
udrīva vajrinn avato na siñcate # RV.8.49 (Vāl.1).6c.
ud vā siñcadhvam upa vā pṛṇadhvam # RV.7.16.11c; SV.1.55c; 2.863c; MS.2.13.8c: 157.8.
ud vepaya rohita pra kṣiṇīhi # AVś.13.3.1g,2e,3e,4e,5f,6g,7f,8e,9f,10f,11f,12f,13g,14g,15f,16g,17f,18g,19g,20e,21g,22e,23g,24f,25g.
upa kṣaranti sindhavo mayobhuvaḥ # RV.1.125.4a; TS.1.8.22.4a; MS.4.11.2a: 165.5; KS.11.5,12a.
ubhā rajī na keśinā patir dan # RV.10.105.2c.
uruḥ panthā dakṣiṇāyā adarśi # RV.10.107.1d.
uhānā yanti sindhavaḥ # RV.8.40.8d.
ūrṇamradā yuvatir (AVś. -mradāḥ pṛthivī) dakṣiṇāvate (TA. dakṣiṇāvatī) # RV.10.18.10c; AVś.18.3.49c; TA.6.7.1c.
ūrdhvas sapta ṛṣīn upa tiṣṭhasva # PB.1.5.5. P: ūrdhvaḥ Lś.2.5.6.
ūrdhvāyāṃ tvā diśi marutaś cāṅgirasaś ca devāḥ ṣaḍbhiś caiva pañcaviṃśair ahobhir abhiṣiñcantv etena ca tṛcenaitena ca yajuṣaitābhiś ca vyāhṛtibhiḥ pārāmeṣṭhyāya # AB.8.19.1.
ṛg vaśā bṛhadrathaṃtare garbhaḥ praiṣanivido jarāyu yajño vatso dakṣiṇā (Apś. dakṣiṇāḥ) pīyūṣaḥ # KS.39.8; Apś.16.32.4. See next, and ṛg asi.
ṛtaṃ tvā satyena pariṣiñcāmi (Kauś. adds jātavedaḥ) # TB.2.1.11.1; śś.2.6.10; Apś.6.5.4; Kauś.3.4. P: ṛtaṃ tvā Vait.7.4. See ṛtasatyābhyāṃ.
ṛtam arṣanti sindhavaḥ # RV.1.105.12c.
ṛta satyāya tvā dakṣiṇāṃ nayāni # śś.2.7.14.
ṛtasya pathā preta candradakṣiṇāḥ # VS.7.45; VSK.9.2.6; TS.1.4.43.2; 6.6.1.3; MS.1.3.37: 43.16; KS.4.9; 28.4; śB.4.3.4.16. P: ṛtasya pathā preta MS.4.8.2: 108.16; Mś.2.4.5.13.
ṛtasya vā keśinā yogyābhiḥ # RV.3.6.6a.
ṛtena yanto adhi sindhum asthuḥ # RV.10.123.4c.
ṛṣiṇeva manīṣiṇā # AVś.8.5.8b.
ṛṣīṇāṃ ca stutīr (SV. ṛṣīṇāṃ suṣṭutīr) upa # RV.1.84.2c; SV.2.380c; VS.8.35c; TS.1.4.38.1c; MS.1.3.34c: 41.12; KS.4.11c.
ekam āsīnaṃ haryatasya pṛṣṭhe # RV.8.100.5b.
etat sarvaṃ dakṣiṇaibhyo dadāti # RV.10.107.8d.
eta devā dakṣiṇataḥ # AVś.11.6.18a; AVP.15.14.8a.
endum indrāya siñcata # RV.8.24.13a; SV.1.386a; 2.859a.
eyam agan dakṣiṇā bhadrato naḥ # AVś.18.4.50a. P: eyam agan Kauś.82.41.
even nu kaṃ sindhum ebhis tatāra # RV.7.33.3a.
eṣā te kāma dakṣiṇā # TB.2.2.5.6; TA.3.10.2,4; Apś.14.11.2.
eṣā paśūn saṃ kṣiṇāti # AVś.3.28.2a.
eṣām ahaṃ samāsīnānām # AVś.7.12.3a.
aindrāvaruṇaṃ maitrāvaruṇasya stotram aindrābārhaspatyaṃ brāhmaṇācchaṃsina aindrāvaiṣṇavam achāvākasya # KS.34.16.
ojasvantaṃ virapśinam # RV.8.76.5b.
ojiṣṭhayā dakṣiṇayeva rātim # RV.1.169.4b.
kac cit kalyāṇyo dakṣiṇāḥ # Apś.10.1.3. Cf. kā dakṣiṇā.
kan navyo atasīnām # RV.8.3.13a; AVś.20.50.1a; AB.6.21.1; KB.24.5; GB.2.6.3; Aś.7.4.6; Vait.27.13; 35.12. P: kan navyaḥ śś.11.11.11; 12.4.1; 16.21.25.
kapiñjala pradakṣiṇam # Kauś.46.54c (bis). See śakuntaka.
karmārā ye manīṣiṇaḥ # AVś.3.5.6b; AVP.3.13.7b.
kaviṃ kavayo 'paso manīṣiṇaḥ # RV.9.72.6b.
dakṣiṇā # AG.1.23.21. Cf. kaccit kalyāṇyo.
kāmo 'kārṣīn namo-namaḥ # Tā.10.61.
kuvayaḥ (KSA. -yiḥ) kuṭarur dātyauhas te vājinām (KSA. sinīvālyai) # MS.3.14.20: 177.2; KSA.7.7. See kvayiḥ.
kuvid rājānaṃ maghavann ṛjīṣin # RV.3.43.5b.
kṛṇute varma dakṣiṇām # AVP.7.15.5d.
kṛṇoṣy ukthaśaṃsinaḥ # RV.6.45.6b.
kṛtaṃ me dakṣiṇe haste # AVś.7.50.8a; AVP.1.49.1a.
kṛṣṇā satī ruśatā dhāsinaiṣā # RV.4.3.9c.
kravyādā preta dakṣiṇā # AVś.12.2.34b.
kravyā nāma stha teṣāṃ vo dakṣiṇā gṛhā dakṣiṇā dik teṣāṃ va āpa iṣavaḥ # AVP.2.56.2. Cf. next, and AVś.3.26; AVP.3.11; TS.5.5.10.4.
klībaṃ (AVP. klīvaṃ) kṛdhy opaśinam # AVś.6.138.2a; AVP.1.68.3a.
klībam (AVP. klīvam) opaśinaṃ kṛdhi # AVś.6.138.1d; AVP.1.68.2d.
kvayiḥ kuṭarur dātyauhas te vājinām (TS. sinīvālyai) # VS.24.39; TS.5.5.17.1. See kuvayaḥ.
kṣaṇāmi brahmaṇāmitrān # AVP.3.19.4c. See kṣiṇomi etc.
kṣatraṃ sam asmān siñcatu # AVP.6.19.1c.
kṣiṇomi (AVś. kṣiṇāmi) brahmaṇāmitrān # AVś.3.19.3c; VS.11.82c; TS.4.1.10.3c; MS.2.7.7c: 84.5; KS.16.7c; 19.10; śB.6.6.3.15c; TA.2.5.3c. See kṣaṇāmi etc.
kṣemaṃ kṛṇvānā janayo na sindhavaḥ # RV.10.124.7c.
kṣodo na reta itaūti siñcat # RV.10.61.2d.
kṣmayā retaḥ saṃjagmāno ni ṣiñcat # RV.10.61.7b; AB.6.27.9; GB.2.6.8.
khajāpo 'jopakāśinīḥ # ApMB.2.13.10b. See bajābo-.
kharvikāṃ kharvavāsinīm # AVś.11.9.16b.
gatvā tu dakṣiṇenāgneḥ # Vait.9.12c.
garbhaṃ dhehi sinīvāli # RV.10.184.2a; AVś.5.25.3a; AVP.12.3.4a; śB.14.9.4.20a; BṛhU.6.4.20a; SMB.1.4.7a; GG.2.5.9; ApMB.1.12.2a (ApG.3.8.13); HG.1.25.1a; MG.2.18.2a; JG.1.22a; PG.1.13a (crit. notes; see Speijer, Jātakarma, p. 19). P: garbhaṃ dhehi KhG.1.4.16.
garbho yo vaḥ sindhavo madhva utsaḥ # RV.10.3.8b.
gavām aha na māyur vatsinīnām # RV.7.103.2c.
gīrbhir vāvṛdhe gṛṇatām ṛṣīṇām # RV.6.44.13d.
gudā āsan sinīvālyāḥ # AVś.9.4.14a.
gṛhasya budhna āsīnāḥ # AVś.2.14.4c; AVP.5.1.4c.
gopāyamānaṃ (KS. -naś) ca mā rakṣamāṇaṃ (KS. -ṇaś) ca dakṣiṇato (KSṃG. paścād) gopāyetām (KSṃG. gopāyatām) # KS.37.10; PG.3.4.15; MG.2.15.1.
grāmaṃ pradakṣiṇaṃ kṛtvā # HG.1.17.3c.
grāvāṇo na sūrayaḥ sindhumātaraḥ # RV.10.78.6a.
grīṣmo dakṣiṇaḥ pakṣaḥ (MS. dakṣiṇaṃ pakṣam) # MS.4.9.18: 135.8; TB.3.10.4.1; TA.4.19.1.
ghasinā (Apś. ghasīnā) me mā saṃpṛkthāḥ # VSK.2.3.6; Apś.3.20.1.
ghṛtapṛṣṭhaṃ manīṣiṇaḥ # RV.1.13.5b.
cakreṇa tāṃ apa vapa ṛjīṣin # RV.8.96.9d.
candraḥ sam asmān siñcatu # AVP.6.19.6c.
caratv āsīno yadi vā svapann api # GB.1.5.5b. See tiṣṭhann āsīno.
chidrā gātrāṇy asinā mithū kaḥ # RV.1.162.20d; VS.25.43d; TS.4.6.9.4d; KSA.6.5d.
jagṛhmā (RV. jagṛbhmā; TB. jagṛbhṇā) te dakṣiṇam indra hastam # RV.10.47.1a; SV.1.317a; MS.4.14.5a: 221.12; 4.14.8: 227.6; TB.2.8.2.5a. P: jagṛhmā te Svidh.2.7.3.
janaṃ yam ugrās tavaso virapśinaḥ # RV.1.166.8c.
jayema taṃ dakṣiṇayā rathena # RV.1.123.5d.
jātavedas tanūvaśin # AVś.1.7.2b; 5.8.2f; AVP.4.4.2b; 7.18.2f.
jihmāyete dakṣiṇā saṃ ca paśyataḥ # Vait.10.17b. See nir hvayete.
jetrā rudreṇa keśinā # AVP.2.25.3b.
joṣavākaṃ vadataḥ pajrahoṣiṇā # RV.6.59.4c; N.5.22c.
jyotir na viśvam abhy asti dakṣiṇā # RV.8.24.21c; AVś.20.65.3c.
taṃ vayāṃsīva pakṣiṇaḥ # AVP.7.8.10a.
tat striyām anu ṣicyate (śG. ṣiñcatu) # AVś.6.11.2b; śG.1.19.8b.
tad agne vidvān pra daha kṣiṇīhi # AVP.12.18.10c.
taṃ tvaṃ śatadakṣiṇa # AVś.10.6.34c.
tapojā amuro dakṣiṇataḥ pavase nabhasvān # AVP.2.69.2.
tam agruvaḥ keśinīḥ saṃ hi rebhire # RV.1.140.8a.
tam ādityā abhyaṣiñcanta sarve # AVP.14.1.1c.
tam u ṣṭuhi yo antaḥ sindhau # AVś.6.1.2a. See tam u ṣṭuhy.
tam u ṣṭuhy antaḥsindhum # Aś.8.1.18a. See tam u ṣṭuhi yo antaḥ.
tayā devatayāṅgirasvad dhruvā sīda # VS.12.53 (bis); 13.19,24; 14.12,14; 15.58; TS.4.2.4.4 (bis); 9.2; 3.6.2; 4.3.3; 5.5.2.4 (bis); 5.4; 6.3; MS.2.7.11: 90.3 (bis); 2.7.15 (bis): 98.1,4; 2.7.16 (quinq.): 99.5,7,9,12,15; 2.8.7: 111.12; 2.8.14 (ter): 117.9,12,14; 2.13.14 (bis): 163.7,14; 2.13.20 (bis): 165.13; 166.11; KS.16.11 (bis),16; 38.13; 39.3 (ter),4 (ter); 40.3 (ter),5; śB.6.1.2.28; 7.1.1.30 (bis); TB.3.10.2.1 (quater); 11.1.1--21; 6.2 (bis); 12.6.6; TA.4.17.1; 18.1; Apś.6.9.4; 16.11.4; 21.6; 23.10 (bis); 17.25.1; 19.11.7; Mś.6.1.5.34. P: tayā devatayā TA.6.6.2; 7.3 (bis); 8.1 (bis); Kś.16.7.14; Mś.6.1.5.5. See tayādevatam, tena chandasā, tena brahmaṇā, tenarṣiṇā, and cf. śB.10.5.1.3.
taveme sapta sindhavaḥ # RV.9.66.6a.
tasmā āpo ghṛtam arṣanti sindhavaḥ # RV.1.125.5c.
tasmā id viśve dhunayanta sindhavaḥ # RV.2.25.5a.
tasmā iyaṃ dakṣiṇā pinvate sadā # RV.1.125.5d.
tasya dakṣiṇā apsarasa stavā nāma (TS. apsarasa stavāḥ; MS. apsarasā eṣṭayo nāma) # VS.18.42; TS.3.4.7.1; MS.2.12.2: 145.6; KS.18.14; śB.9.4.1.11.
tasya vratāni bhūripoṣiṇo vayam # RV.3.3.9c.
tasyāṃ tvayy etāṃ dakṣiṇāṃ nidadhe 'kṣitim akṣīyamāṇāṃ śriyaṃ devānāṃ bṛhaj jyotir vasānāṃ prajānāṃ śaciṣṭhām ā vratam (read āvṛtam ?) anugeṣam # JB.2.258. Cf. śabali prajānāṃ.
tasyed ime pravaṇe sapta sindhavaḥ # RV.10.43.3c; AVś.20.17.3c.
tān anveti pathibhir dakṣiṇāvān # TA.1.7.4b. See tān pathā.
tān asmin dhehi tanūvaśin # AVś.4.4.8d. Cf. under asmin dhehi tanūvaśin.
tāni vidur brāhmaṇā ye manīṣiṇaḥ # RV.1.164.45b; AVś.9.10.27b; śB.4.1.3.17b; TB.2.8.8.6b; JUB.1.7.4b; 40.1b; N.13.9b.
tāṃ devā guhyām āsīnām # AVP.9.11.13c.
tān pathā vā anv eti dakṣiṇāvān # AVP.5.6.1b. See tān anveti.
tābhir adbhir abhiṣiñcāmi tvām aham # AB.8.7.3c.
tābhiṣ ṭvābhiṣiñcāmi # MG.2.14.26c (bis). See tena tvām.
vo nāmāni sindhavaḥ # AVś.3.13.1d; AVP.3.4.1d; TS.5.6.1.2d; MS.2.13.1d: 152.8; KS.39.2d.
tiṣṭhann āsīno yadi vā svapann api # śB.12.3.2.7b. See caratv.
tīvraṃ sutaṃ pañcadaśaṃ ni ṣiñcam # RV.10.27.2d.
tubhyam arṣanti sindhavaḥ # RV.9.31.3b; 62.27c.
tūṣṇīm āsīnaḥ sumatiṃ cikiddhi naḥ # RV.2.43.3b; RVKh.2.43.6b; Kauś.46.54b.
tejaḥ sam asmān siñcatu # AVP.6.19.8c.
te tvā dakṣiṇato (also paścād, and purastād) gopāyantu # PG.2.17.13c,14b,15c.
te dakṣiṇāṃ duhate saptamātaram # RV.10.107.4d. See te duhrate.
te duhrate dakṣiṇāṃ saptamātaram # AVś.18.4.29d. See te dakṣiṇāṃ.
tena ṛṣiṇā etc. # see tenarṣiṇā.
tena chandasā tena brahmaṇā tayā devatayāṅgirasvad dhruvā sīda # MS.2.13.14 (bis): 163.7,14; 2.13.20 (bis): 165.13; 166.11. Fragments (with ūha): dhruvāḥ sīdata Mś.6.1.8.2; dhruve sīdatam Mś.6.1.8.8. See tena brahmaṇā, tenarṣiṇā, and cf. tayā devatayāṅgirasvad.
tena tvām abhiṣiñcāmi # YDh.1.280c. See tābhiṣ ṭvābhi-.
tena mām abhiṣiñcatam # śś.8.11.13f; SMB.1.7.5f. Cf. tenemām upa.
tena mām abhiṣiñcāmi śriyai # PG.2.6.11b. See tenāhaṃ mām etc.
tenarṣiṇā (Aś. tena ṛṣiṇā; MS. tena ṛṣiṇā tena vidhinā tena chandasā) tena brahmaṇā tayā devatayāṅgirasvad dhruvā sīda # TS.4.4.6.2; MS.4.9.15: 134.12; 4.9.16: 135.3; TB.3.12.6.1,6; 7.1,5; 8.1,3; Aś.2.3.25; Apś.16.28.1 (bis). See tena chandasā, tena brahmaṇā, and cf. tayā devatayāṅgirasvad.
tenāhaṃ mām abhiṣiñcāmi varcase (SMB. omits varcase) # Apś.6.14.7d; SMB.1.7.3b. See tena mām etc.
tenemam (sc. abhiṣiñcāmi etc.) # KhG.3.1.12. ūha of tenāhaṃ mām abhi-, q.v.
tenemām upa siñcatam # RV.4.57.5c; AVś.3.17.7c; TA.6.6.2c; N.9.41c. Cf. tena mām abhiṣiñcatam.
tebhyo daśa prācīr daśa dakṣiṇā daśa pratīcīr daśodīcīr daśordhvāḥ # VS.16.64--66; TS.4.5.11.2; śB.9.1.1.38; MS.2.9.9 (ter): 129.9,12,15; KS.17.16 (ter).
te mā dakṣiṇato gopāyetām # PG.3.4.15.
teṣāṃ śirāṃsy asinā chinadmi # AVP.5.15.9c.
teṣāṃ saṃ hanmo akṣāṇi (AVś. saṃ dadhmo akṣīṇi; AVP. saṃ dadhmo akṣāṇi) # RV.7.55.6c; AVś.4.5.5c; AVP.4.6.5c.
teṣām īśānaṃ (AVP. īśāne) vaśinī no adya # AVP.1.91.4c; Kauś.115.2c.
tmanā sahasrapoṣiṇam # RV.8.103.4d; SV.1.58d.
trayaḥ keśina ṛtuthā vi cakṣate # RV.1.164.44a; AVś.9.10.26a; N.12.27a. Cf. BṛhD.1.95.
trayo 'naḍvāhaḥ sinīvālyai # TS.5.6.18.1; KSA.9.8.
trir aśvinā sindhubhiḥ saptamātṛbhiḥ # RV.1.34.8a.
trī dhanva yojanā sapta sindhūn # RV.1.35.8b; VS.34.24b.
trī ṣadhasthā sindhavas triḥ kavīnām # RV.3.56.5a.
tvaṃ vṛtrāṃ ariṇā indra sindhūn # RV.4.19.5d; 42.7d.
tvaṃ turīyā vaśinī vaśāsi # TS.3.4.2.2a; 3.5; Apś.19.17.10. See vaśāsi.
tvaṃ nṛbhir dakṣiṇāvadbhir agne # RV.10.69.8c.
tvam agne prayatadakṣiṇaṃ naram # RV.1.31.15a.
tvam agne mānuṣīṇām # RV.6.48.8b. See viśvāsāṃ mānuṣīṇām.
tvāṃ giraḥ sindhum ivāvanīr mahīḥ # RV.5.11.5c; MS.2.13.7c: 156.7.
tvām agne manīṣiṇaḥ # RV.3.10.1a; 8.44.19a; KS.40.14a; śś.6.4.9.
tvām adya ṛṣa ārṣeya ṛṣīṇāṃ (KSṭB. adyarṣa ārṣeyarṣīṇāṃ) napād avṛṇītāyaṃ (TB.2.6.15.2, -yaṃ sutāsutī) yajamānaḥ # VS.21.61; 28.23,46; MS.4.13.9: 211.9; KS.19.13; TB.2.6.15.2; 3.6.15.1.
tveṣaṃ gaṇaṃ mārutaṃ navyasīnām # RV.5.53.10b.
dakṣāya tvā dakṣiṇāṃ pratigṛhṇāmi # TB.3.11.8.8.
dakṣiṇataḥ prayato dakṣiṇena # AVP.7.15.8d.
dakṣiṇaṃ pādam avanenije # AB.8.27.8; SMB.2.8.7; GG.4.10.10. P: dakṣiṇam KhG.4.4.11. Cf. imau pādāv avaniktau.
dakṣiṇayā diśā (śś. diśā saha) māsāḥ pitaro mārjayantām # MS.1.4.2: 48.11; KS.5.5; śś.4.11.4. See dakṣiṇasyāṃ diśi, and dakṣiṇāyāṃ diśi māsāḥ.
dakṣiṇasyāṃ tvā diśi rudrā abhiṣiñcantu vṛddhaye # Rvidh.4.22.2. See next.
dakṣiṇasyāṃ tvā diśi rudrā devāḥ ṣaḍbhiś caiva pañcaviṃśair ahobhir abhiṣiñcantv etena ca tṛcenaitena ca yajuṣaitābhiś ca vyāhṛtibhir bhaujyāya # AB.8.19.1. See prec.
dakṣiṇasyāṃ diśi māsāḥ pitaro mārjayantām # Aś.1.11.7; JG.1.4. See under dakṣiṇayā diśā etc.
dakṣiṇāṃ vrāhmaṇakṛte # see dakṣiṇāṃ brāhmaṇakṛte.
dakṣiṇā dik # AVś.3.27.2; AVP.3.24.2; VS.14.13; 15.11; TS.4.3.6.2; 4.2.1; 5.5.10.1; KS.7.2; 17.3,8; 20.11; 39.7; MS.1.5.4: 71.10; 2.7.20: 105.3; 2.8.3: 108.8; 2.8.9: 113.10; 2.13.21: 166.16; TB.3.11.5.1; śB.8.3.1.14; 6.1.6; Apś.6.18.3; ApMB.2.17.15. See next but one, and cf. dakṣiṇāyai tvā diśa.
dakṣiṇānām ayanaṃ dakṣiṇāgniḥ # AVś.18.4.8c.
dakṣiṇābhyaḥ svāhā # TS.7.4.21.1. See dakṣiṇāyai svāhā.
dakṣiṇā mā dakṣiṇataḥ # AVP.2.85.3a; 7.15.1a.
dakṣiṇāyāṃ diśi dakṣiṇaṃ dhehi pārśvam # AVś.4.14.7d.
dakṣiṇāyāṃ diśi māsāḥ pitaro mārjayantām # TS.1.6.5.1. See under dakṣiṇayā diśā etc.
dakṣiṇāyai svāhā # KSA.4.10. See dakṣiṇābhyaḥ.
dakṣiṇāvatām id imāni citrā # RV.1.125.6a. P: dakṣiṇāvatām VHDh.8.59.
dakṣiṇāśvaṃ dakṣiṇā gāṃ dadāti # RV.10.107.7a.
dakṣiṇā sam asmān siñcatu # AVP.6.19.7c.
dakṣiṇāsi # VS.4.19; TS.1.2.4.1; 6.1.7.5; MS.1.2.4: 13.3; 3.7.5: 81.17; KS.2.5; 24.3. P: dakṣiṇā śB.3.2.4.16.
dakṣiṇe pakṣe rathaṃtaram uttare bṛhad ātmani vāmadevyaṃ puche yajñāyajñiyaṃ dakṣiṇe nikakṣe prajāpatihṛdayam agnyukthaṃ śaṃsa # Kś.18.3.3.
dadāsīmāṃ dakṣiṇāṃ mā ta āmamat # AVP.7.15.4a.
daśa tryaruṣīṇām # RV.8.46.22d.
daśa purastād rocase daśa dakṣiṇā # TA.4.6.2a.
daśa prācīr daśa bhāsi dakṣiṇāḥ (KA.3.227, dakṣiṇā) # MS.4.9.5a: 125.3; TA.4.6.1a; KA.3.227,228a; Apś.15.8.12. P: daśa prācīḥ Mś.4.2.36.
dānaṃ yajñānāṃ varūthaṃ dakṣiṇā # TA.10.63.1a; MahānU.22.1a.
dāsa no dakṣiṇān avagṛhāṇa # PB.1.7.9. P: dāsa Lś.2.8.13.
diva ā pṛthivyā ṛjīṣin # RV.8.79.4b.
diva āhuḥ pare ardhe purīṣiṇam # RV.1.164.12b; AVś.9.9.12b; PraśU.1.11b.
divaṃ kṛtvā dakṣiṇām # AVś.13.1.52b.
divo dhartā sindhur āpaḥ samudriyaḥ # RV.10.65.13b; N.12.30b.
divo vṛṣṭiṃ varṣayatā purīṣiṇaḥ # MS.2.4.7b: 45.1. See yūyaṃ vṛṣṭiṃ.
diśo yajñasya dakṣiṇāḥ # Aś.5.13.14. See yaśo yajñasya.
diśo hotrāśaṃsinyas tā me hotrāśaṃsinyaḥ # Mś.2.1.1.4.
dīkṣayāpnoti dakṣiṇām # VS.19.30b.
duhīyad indra dakṣiṇā maghonī # RV.2.11.21b; N.1.7b.
dūṇāśeyaṃ dakṣiṇā pārthavānām # RV.6.27.8d.
dūrvā duḥsvapnanāśinī # TA.10.1.7d; MahānU.4.1d.
devasya tvā savituḥ prasave 'śvinor bāhubhyāṃ pūṣṇo hastābhyāṃ sarasvatyā vācā yantur yantreṇa bṛhaspatiṃ sāmrājyāyābhiṣiñcāmi # MS.1.11.4: 165.7; 3.4.3: 47.8. P: devasya tvā savituḥ prasave Mś.6.2.5.30. Fragment: bṛhaspatiṃ sāmrājyāya, with ūhas indraṃ sāmrājyāya and agniṃ sāmrājyāya (q.v.) Mś.6.2.5.31. See next, and devasya tvā ... hastābhyāṃ sarasvatyai vāco yantur yantreṇā-.
devasya tvā savituḥ prasave 'śvinor bāhubhyāṃ pūṣṇo hastābhyāṃ sarasvatyā vācā yantur yantreṇemam amum āmuṣyāyaṇam amuṣyāḥ putraṃ bṛhaspates (KS.40.9, putram agnes) sāmrājyenābhiṣiñcāmi (KS.14.2, -ṣiñcāmīndrasya sāmrājyenābhiṣiñcāmi) # KS.14.2,8; 40.9. See under prec.
devasya tvā savituḥ prasave 'śvinor bāhubhyāṃ pūṣṇo hastābhyāṃ sarasvatyai tvā vāco yantur yantreṇa bṛhaspates tvā sāmrājyena brahmaṇābhiṣiñcāmi # JB.2.130. See under prec. but one.
devasya tvā savituḥ prasave 'śvinor bāhubhyāṃ pūṣṇo hastābhyāṃ sarasvatyai (KS. -tyā) bhaiṣajyena vīryāyānnādyāyābhiṣiñcāmi # VS.20.3; KS.38.4; TB.2.6.5.2.
devasya tvā savituḥ prasave 'śvinor bāhubhyāṃ pūṣṇo hastābhyāṃ sarasvatyai vāco yantur yantreṇāgneḥ (TS. yantreṇāgnes tvā) sāmrājyenābhiṣiñcāmi # VS.18.37; TS.1.7.10.3; śB.9.3.4.17. Fragmentary: devasya tvā savituḥ prasave (Apś. devasya tvā) ... agnes tvā sāmrājyenābhiṣiñcāmi TS.5.6.3.2; TB.1.3.8.2,3; Apś.17.19.8. P: devasya tvā Kś.18.5.9. See under devasya tvā ... hastābhyāṃ sarasvatyā vācā yantur yantreṇa.
devasya tvā savituḥ prasave 'śvinor bāhubhyāṃ pūṣṇo hastābhyām agnes tejasā sūryasya varcasendrasyendriyeṇābhi ṣiñcāmi # AB.8.7.5,7,9. P: devasya tvā AB.8.13.2; 18.1.
devasya tvā savituḥ prasave 'śvinor bāhubhyāṃ pūṣṇo hastābhyām aśvinor bhaiṣajyena tejase brahmavarcasāyābhi ṣiñcāmi # VS.20.3; KS.38.4; TB.2.6.5.2; Apś.19.9.13.
devasya tvā savituḥ prasave 'śvinor bāhubhyāṃ pūṣṇo hastābhyām indrasyendriyeṇa śriyai yaśase balāyābhi (VS.KS. -yeṇa balāya śriyai yaśase 'bhi) ṣiñcāmi # VS.20.3; KS.38.4; TB.2.6.5.3. Cf. indrasyendriyeṇa balāya.
devānāṃ ca ṛṣīṇāṃ ca # MS.2.9.1a: 119.5.
devānāṃ pūr asi tāṃ tvā praviśāmi tāṃ tvā pra padye saha gṛhaiḥ saha prajayā saha paśubhiḥ sahartvigbhiḥ saha sadasyaiḥ saha somyaiḥ saha dakṣiṇīyaiḥ saha yajñena saha yajñapatinā # KS.35.10.
devān manuṣyāṃ asurān uta ṛṣīn (AVP. utarṣīn) # AVś.8.9.24d; AVP.11.5.11d.
devāpinā preṣitā mṛkṣiṇīṣu # RV.10.98.6d.
devīr mām abhiṣiñcantu # Mś.1.6.2.17b.
devau savāsināv iva # AVś.3.29.6c.
deṣṭrī ca yā sinīvālī # AVP.5.26.5a.
deṣṭrī samudraḥ sinīvālī # AVP.11.15.3a.
dehi dakṣiṇāṃ pratirasvāyuḥ # TB.2.7.17.2c.
dehi dakṣiṇāṃ brāhmaṇebhyaḥ # AVP.2.52.5c.
daivī pūrtir dakṣiṇā devayajyā # RV.10.107.3a.
dyāvāpṛthivyoḥ pārśvam # TS.5.7.21.1; 22.1; KSA.13.11,12. See dyāvāpṛthivyor dakṣiṇaṃ.
dyāvāpṛthivyor dakṣiṇaṃ pārśvam # VS.25.5; MS.3.15.5: 179.6. See dyāvāpṛthivyoḥ pārśvam.
dvādaśa ṣoḍaśinaḥ ṣaṣṭiḥ # GB.1.5.23c; Vait.31.15c.
dvināmnī dīkṣā vaśinī hy ugrā # TB.2.7.17.1b. See next.
dvināmnīṃ dīkṣāṃ vaśinīṃ ya āyat # AVP.2.52.2b. See prec.
dhartāraṃ mānuṣīṇām # RV.5.9.3c.
dhātā te taṃ sinīvālī # AVP.11.1.2a.
dhātā mā nirṛtyā dakṣiṇāyā diśaḥ pātu # AVś.18.3.26a.
dhiyo hinvānā uśijo manīṣiṇaḥ # RV.2.21.5b.
dhiṣva vajraṃ hasta ā dakṣiṇatrā # RV.6.18.9c.
dhiṣva vajraṃ dakṣiṇa indra haste # RV.6.22.9c; AVś.20.36.9c.
dhṛṣṇur vajrī śavasā dakṣiṇāvān # RV.6.29.3b.
nakṣat kāmaṃ martyānām asinvan # RV.7.39.6b.
na tatra dakṣiṇā yanti # śB.10.5.4.16c.
na te savyaṃ na dakṣiṇam # RV.8.24.5a.
na tvā gabhīraḥ puruhūta sindhuḥ # RV.3.32.16a.
na dakṣiṇā vi cikite na savyā # RV.2.27.11a; TS.2.1.11.5a; MS.4.14.14a: 238.14; Aś.3.8.1. P: na dakṣiṇā TB.2.8.1.6.
nama ākṣiṇakebhyaḥ # MS.2.9.9: 127.4. See namo vikṣiṇatkebhyaḥ.
nama āsīnebhyaḥ śayānebhyaś ca vo namaḥ # TS.4.5.3.2. See namaḥ śayānebhya.
nama uṣṇīṣiṇe giricarāya # VS.16.22; TS.4.5.3.1; MS.2.9.3: 123.7; KS.17.12.
namaḥ śayānebhya (MS. -bhyā) āsīnebhyaś ca vo namaḥ # VS.16.23; KS.17.13; MS.2.9.4: 123.12. See nama āsīnebhyaḥ.
namas te keśinībhyaḥ # AVś.11.2.31b.
namas te ghoṣiṇībhyaḥ # AVś.11.2.31a.
namas te rathaṃtarāya yat te dakṣiṇato yat te dakṣiṇaḥ pakṣaḥ # Lś.3.11.3. See next, and namas te rāthaṃtarāya.
namas te rathaṃtarāya yas te dakṣiṇo bāhur yas te dakṣiṇaḥ pakṣaḥ # śś.17.13.2. See under prec.
namas te rāthaṃtarāya yas te dakṣiṇaḥ pakṣaḥ # ā.5.1.2.3. See under namas te rathaṃtarāya yat.
namo dakṣiṇāyai diśe yāś ca devatā etasyāṃ prati vasanty etābhyaś ca namaḥ # TA.2.20.1.
namo yuvabhya āśīnebhyaś (KS. āśi-) ca vo namo-namaḥ (KS. namaḥ) # MS.2.9.4: 124.3; KS.17.13. Cf. next.
namo yuvabhyo nama āśinebhyaḥ # RV.1.27.13b; Apś.24.13.3b. Cf. prec.
namo vikṣiṇatkebhyaḥ (TS.KS. vikṣīṇakebhyaḥ) # VS.16.46; TS.4.5.9.2; KS.17.16; śB.9.1.1.23. See nama ākṣiṇakebhyaḥ.
nayiṣṭhā no neṣiṇa stha # AVP.5.39.3c. See prec.
nare ca dakṣiṇāvate # RV.9.98.10c; SV.2.681c,1029c.
naro yat te duduhur dakṣiṇena # TB.3.7.13.1b. See naro yad vā.
navantam ahiṃ saṃ piṇag ṛjīṣin # RV.6.17.10d.
na vāṃ dyāvo 'habhir nota sindhavaḥ # RV.1.151.9c.
na stome 'nupraveśinaḥ # SMB.2.5.2b.
nāvā na sindhum ati parṣi vidvān # RV.9.70.10c.
nāsad āsīn no sad āsīt tadānīm # RV.10.129.1a; JB.3.360a; śB.10.5.3.2; TB.2.8.9.3a. P: nāsad āsīt VHDh.5.295,425; Rvidh.4.9.3. Cf. BṛhD.8.45; Mahābh.12.343.8.
ni te padāṃ pṛthivī yantu sindhavaḥ # AVP.5.15.7a.
nityapuṣṭāṃ karīṣiṇīm # RVKh.5.87.9b; TA.10.1.10b; MG.2.13.6b; MahānU.4.8b.
ni padvanto ni pakṣiṇaḥ # RV.10.127.5b.
nimnaṃ na yanti sindhavo 'bhi prayaḥ # RV.5.51.7c.
nir balāsaṃ balāsinaḥ # AVś.6.14.2a; AVP.1.90.3a.
nir hvayete dakṣiṇāḥ saṃ ca paśyataḥ # AVP.5.28.2b. See jihmāyete.
nilimpā nāma stha teṣāṃ vo dakṣiṇā gṛhāḥ pitaro va iṣavaḥ sagaraḥ (ApMB. sagaro vātanāmam) # TS.5.5.10.3; ApMB.2.17.21 (ApG.7.18.12).
ni vartante dakṣiṇā nīyamānāḥ # GB.1.5.25a.
nṛbhyas tarāya sindhavaḥ supārāḥ # RV.8.96.1d.
pakvaṃ māṃsam ivāśinā # AVP.6.23.10d.
pade-pade pāśinaḥ santi setavaḥ (AVś.AVP. setave) # RV.9.73.4d; AVś.5.6.3d; AVP.6.11.4d; KS.38.14d; Apś.16.18.7d.
padbhyāṃ dakṣiṇasavyābhyām # AVś.12.1.28c.
parā vahantu sindhavaḥ # AVś.10.4.20b.
pari nṛtyanti keśinīḥ # AVś.12.5.48b.
pari va ūmebhyaḥ siñcatā madhu # RV.10.32.5d.
pariṣkṛtasya rasina iyam āsutiḥ # RV.8.1.26c; SV.2.743c.
pari hetiḥ pakṣiṇī no vṛṇaktu # RV.10.165.2d; AVś.6.27.2d; MG.2.17.1d.
parjanyaḥ puruṣīṇām # RV.7.102.2c; TB.2.4.5.6c; TA.1.29.1c.
parjanya ghoṣiṇaḥ pṛthak # AVP.5.7.5b. See mārutāḥ parjanya etc.
parjanyāvātā vṛṣabhā purīṣiṇā # RV.10.65.9a.
parṣiṣṭhā u naḥ parṣaṇy (AVP. -ṣṭhāḥ parṣiṇaḥ) ati dviṣaḥ # RV.10.126.3d; AVP.5.39.3d.
pitaras tvā manojavā dakṣiṇataḥ pāntu # MS.1.2.8: 18.2. See manojavaso, and manojavās tvā.
pitaras tvā yamarājānaḥ pitṛbhir dakṣiṇataḥ pāntu (MS. dakṣiṇato rocayantu) # TS.5.5.9.4; MS.4.9.5: 125.5; Mś.6.2.4.1.
pitaro 'ryamā bhagaḥ savitā tvaṣṭā vāyur indrāgnī ity etāni dakṣiṇadvarāṇi daivatāni sanakṣatrāṇi sagrahāṇi sāhorātrāṇi samuhūrtāni tarpayāmi # BDh.2.5.9.2.
pitṝn tapasvato yama # RV.10.154.4c. See ṛṣīn etc.
pipīḍe aṃśur madyo na sindhuḥ # RV.4.22.8a.
pibā sutasya rasinaḥ # RV.8.3.1a; SV.1.239a; 2.771a; AB.4.29.15; 5.6.7; 16.28; ā.5.2.4.2; Aś.5.15.21; 7.12.7; śś.7.20.6; 12.7.5; 9.11.
pīpyānā kūśakreṇa siñcan # RV.10.102.11b.
puṃsā kartrā mātari mā niṣiñca (read -ṣiñcata) # KBU.1.2d. See puṃsaḥ kartur.
putravatī dakṣiṇata indrasyādhipatye prajāṃ me dāḥ # VS.37.12; MS.4.9.3: 124.1; śB.14.1.3.20; TA.4.5.3; KA.2.82--83.
purastāt pātu dakṣiṇā # AVP.2.85.3d.
purā krūrasya visṛpo virapśin (MS. -pśinaḥ) # VS.1.28a; TS.1.1.9.3a; MS.1.1.10a: 6.9; KS.1.9a; 25.5; śB.1.2.5.19; TB.3.2.9.13. P: purā krūrasya Kś.2.6.32; Mś.1.2.4.22.
purā nūnaṃ ca stutaya ṛṣīṇām # RV.6.34.1c.
purū retāṃsi pitṛbhiś ca siñcataḥ # RV.10.64.14d.
puroḍāśena tvām adyarṣa ārṣyeyarṣīṇāṃ napād avṛṇīta # TB.3.6.15.1.
pūr asi taṃ tvā prapadye saha grahaiḥ saha pragrahaiḥ saha prajayā saha paśubhiḥ sahartvigbhyaḥ saha somyaiḥ saha sadasyaiḥ saha dākṣiṇeyaiḥ saha yajñena saha yajñapatinā # Apś.14.26.1.
pūrṇam ahaṃ karīṣiṇam # AVP.5.16.8a.
pūrdhi yavasya kāśinā # RV.8.78.10d.
pūrvavatsena saha vatsinī gauḥ # AVP.11.5.5a.
pūṣā sam asmān siñcatu # AVP.6.18.3c.
pṛthivi bhūvari (so Apś. with haplography; KS. vibhūvari) sinīvāly urandhra (KS. uraṃdha) ācitte manas te bhuvo vivaste # KS.35.3; Apś.14.17.3.
pṛthū ratho dakṣiṇāyā ayoji # RV.1.123.1a. P: pṛthū rathaḥ Aś.4.14.2. Cf. BṛhD.3.140.
pṛśniṃ varuṇa dakṣiṇāṃ dadāvān # AVś.5.11.1c; AVP.8.1.1c.
pra kṛtāny ṛjīṣiṇaḥ # RV.8.32.1a; ā.5.2.3.2; Aś.6.4.10; śś.18.7.10. P: pra kṛtāni śś.9.8.1; Rvidh.2.31.7. Cf. BṛhD.6.75.
pra kṣiṇāty avartyā # AVś.12.2.35b.
pra kṣiṇīhi ny arpaya # AVś.10.3.15d.
praghāsyān (VS.śB.Kś. -ghāsino) havāmahe # VS.3.44a; TS.1.8.3.1a; MS.1.10.2a: 141.10; KS.9.4a; śB.2.5.2.21a; TB.1.6.5.3; Apś.8.6.19; Mś.1.7.4.12. P: praghāsinaḥ Kś.5.5.10.
prajākāmā vaśinī vāśitā gauḥ # AVP.6.10.1b.
prajāpates tvā parameṣṭhinaḥ svārājyenābhiṣiñcāmi # TB.2.7.6.3; Apś.20.20.3; 22.12.20.
prajāpates tvā prasave pṛthivyā nābhāv antarikṣasya bāhubhyāṃ divo hastābhyāṃ prajāpates tvā parameṣṭhinaḥ svārājyenābhiṣiñcāmi # Apś.20.20.3.
pra jāyante dakṣiṇā asya pūrvīḥ # RV.4.36.5d.
prataṅkaṃ dadruṣīṇām (AVP. dadruṣī nu) # AVś.5.13.8c; AVP.8.2.7c.
pra taṃ kṣiṇāṃ parvate pādagṛhya # RV.10.27.4d.
pratataṃ pārayiṣṇum # MS.4.9.2c: 123.4. See dakṣiṇābhiḥ pra-.
pratiprasthātar vasatīvarīṇāṃ hotṛcamasaṃ pūrayitvā dakṣiṇena hotāram abhiprayamya cātvālānte pratyupāsva # Mś.2.3.2.9.
prati ṣṭobhanti sindhavaḥ pavibhyaḥ # RV.1.168.8a.
pratīcyāṃ tvā diśy ādityā abhiṣiñcantu puṣṭaye # Rvidh.4.22.3. Cf. next.
pratīcyāṃ tvā diśy ādityā devāḥ ṣaḍbhiś caiva pañcaviṃśair ahobhir abhiṣiñcantv etena ca tṛcenaitena ca yajuṣaitābhiś ca vyāhṛtibhiḥ svārājyāya # AB.8.19.1. Cf. prec.
praty āyaṃ sindhum āvadan # RV.1.11.6b; JB.3.238b.
pratvakṣasaḥ pratavaso virapśinaḥ # RV.1.87.1a; AB.4.30.11; KB.20.2. Ps: pratvakṣasaḥ pratavasaḥ Aś.5.20.6; pratvakṣasaḥ śś.8.6.4.
prathamās tvā dvitīyair abhi ṣiñcantu # MS.3.11.8: 151.9. See prathamā dvitīyaiḥ.
pradakṣiṇaṃ marutāṃ etc. # see pradakṣiṇin.
pradakṣiṇin (AVś. pradakṣiṇaṃ) marutāṃ stomam ṛdhyām (MS. aśyām) # RV.5.60.1d; AVś.7.50.3d; MS.4.14.11d: 232.14; TB.2.7.12.4d.
pra nimneneva sindhavaḥ # RV.9.17.1a.
pra pastyām aditiṃ sindhum arkaiḥ # RV.4.55.3a.
prapruthyā śipre maghavann ṛjīṣin # RV.3.32.1c.
pra yat sindhavaḥ prasavaṃ yathāyan (TB. yad āyan) # RV.3.36.6a; TB.2.4.3.11a.
pra rudreṇa yayinā yanti sindhavaḥ # RV.10.92.5a.
prasavaś copayāmaś ca kāṭaś cārṇavaś ca dharṇasiś ca draviṇaṃ ca bhagaś cāntarikṣaṃ ca sindhuś ca samudraś ca sarasvāṃś ca viśvavyacāś ca te yaṃ dviṣmo yaś ca no dveṣṭi tam eṣāṃ jambhe dadhma svāhā # ApMB.1.10.7 (ApG.3.8.10).
pra sṛtvarīṇām ati sindhur ojasā # RV.10.75.1d.
prācyāṃ tvā diśi vasavo abhisiñcantu tejase # Rvidh.4.22.2. Cf. next.
prācyāṃ tvā diśi vasavo devāḥ ṣaḍbhiś caiva pañcaviṃśair ahobhir abhiṣiñcantv etena ca tṛcenaitena ca yajuṣaitābhiś ca vyāhṛtibhiḥ sāmrājyāya # AB.8.19.1. Cf. prec.
prāvīvipad vāca ūrmiṃ na sindhuḥ # RV.9.96.7a; SV.2.295a.
priyo dātur dakṣiṇāyā iha syām # AVś.6.58.1d. See next but one.
priyo devānāṃ dakṣiṇāyai dātur iha bhūyāsam # VS.26.2. See prec. but one.
priyo viśām atithir mānuṣīṇām # RV.5.1.9d; TB.2.4.7.10d.
plakṣaṃ dakṣiṇatas tathā # GG.4.7.22b.
bādhiryāt pātu dakṣiṇā # AVP.7.15.6e.
bibhrat saṃśreṣiṇe 'jayat # AVś.8.5.14d.
bṛhadreṇuś cyavano mānuṣīṇām # RV.6.18.2c; KS.8.17c.
bṛhaspatis tvopariṣṭād abhiṣiñcatu pāṅktena chandasā # TB.2.7.15.8. Cf. bṛhaspatiṣ ṭvā viśvair.
bṛhaspateṣ ṭvā (TSṭB. -tes tvā) sāmrājyenābhi ṣiñcāmy asau (VSKṭSṭB. -bhi ṣiñcāmi) # VS.9.30; VSK.10.5.8; TS.5.6.3.3; śB.5.2.2.14; TB.1.3.8.4. P: bṛhaspateḥ Apś.17.19.8. Cf. indrasya bṛhaspates.
brahmaṇa ṛgbhiḥ payasa ṛṣīṇām # AVś.10.1.12d.
brahma yat pāsi śavasinn ṛṣīṇām # RV.7.28.2b.
brahmayujo haraya indra keśinaḥ # RV.8.1.24c; SV.1.245c; 2.741c.
brahmāṇi mandan gṛṇatām ṛṣīṇām # RV.10.89.16b.
brahmā haikaṃ brāhmaṇācchaṃsinaḥ saha # GB.1.5.24c.
brahmeme sapta sindhavaḥ # AVP.8.9.2b.
brāhmaṇam adya ṛdhyāsaṃ (KS. adyardhyā-) pitṛmantaṃ paitṛmatyam ṛṣim ārṣeyaṃ sudhātudakṣiṇam # MS.1.3.37: 43.16; 4.8.2: 108.18; KS.4.9; 28.4; Mś.2.4.5.14. See next two.
brāhmaṇam adya rādhyāsam ṛṣim ārṣeyaṃ pitṛmantaṃ paitṛmatyaṃ sudhātudakṣiṇam # TS.1.4.43.2. Ps: brāhmaṇam adya rādhyāsam ṛṣim ārṣeyam TS.6.6.1.3; brāhmaṇam adya rādhyāsam Apś.13.6.12. See prec. and next.
brāhmaṇam adya videyaṃ (VSK. videya) pitṛmantaṃ paitṛmatyam ṛṣim ārṣeyaṃ sudhātudakṣiṇam # VS.7.46; VSK.9.2.6; śB.4.3.4.19. P: brāhmaṇam adya Kś.10.2.19. See prec. two.
bhagaḥ sam asmān siñcatu # AVP.6.18.4c.
bhadraṃ yuñjanti dakṣiṇam # RV.10.164.2b.
bhadraṃ vada dakṣiṇataḥ # RVKh.2.43.1a; Kauś.46.54a; N.9.5a.
bhadraṃ te agne sahasinn anīkam # RV.4.11.1a; TS.4.3.13.1a. P: bhadraṃ te agne Aś.4.13.7. Cf. BṛhD.1.58.
bhadrā vo rātiḥ pṛṇato na dakṣiṇā # RV.1.168.7c.
bharatam uddharem (TB. comm. uddhara imam; Mś. uddharema) anuṣiñca (Mś. omits anuṣiñca) # TB.3.7.5.5; Apś.2.18.9; Mś.1.3.2.12.
bhātvakṣaso aty aktur na sindhavaḥ # RV.1.143.3c.
bhīmaṃ rathaṃ keśinaḥ pādayantām # AVś.11.2.18b.
bhūmim ātān dyāṃ dhāsināyoḥ # RV.6.67.6d.
madāya kratve apibo virapśin # RV.6.40.2b.
madhu kṣaranti sindhavaḥ # RV.1.90.6b; VS.13.27b; TS.4.2.9.3b; MS.2.7.16b: 99.18; KS.39.3b; śB.14.9.3.11b; TA.10.10.2b; 49.1b; BṛhU.6.3.11b; MahānU.9.8b; 17.7b; Kauś.91.1b.
madhumad vāṃ sindhavo mitra duhre # RV.5.69.2b.
madhye devānām āsīnā # HG.1.15.7c.
madhvā rajāṃsīndriyam # MS.3.11.3c: 143.12; KS.38.8c; TB.2.6.12.1c. See adhvā etc.
manaś ca mā pitṛyajñaś ca yajño dakṣiṇata udañcam (sc. ubhau kāmaprau bhūtvā kṣityā sahāviśatām) # Vait.12.1. P: manaś ca mā pitṛyajñaś ca yajño dakṣiṇata udañcam ubhau GB.1.3.22.
manojavaso vaḥ pitṛbhir dakṣiṇata upadadhatām # TA.1.20.1. See under pitaras tvā manojavā.
manojavās tvā pitṛbhir (KS. pitaro) dakṣiṇataḥ pātu (KS. pāntu) # VS.5.11; TS.1.2.12.2; KS.2.9; śB.3.5.2.6. See under pitaras tvā manojavā.
mandānaḥ somaṃ papivāṃ ṛjīṣin # RV.3.50.3c.
mandrasya rūpaṃ vividur manīṣiṇaḥ # RV.9.68.6a.
manyunā kṛtaṃ manyuḥ karoti manyava evedaṃ sarvaṃ yo mā kārayati tasmai svāhā # BDh.3.4.2. Cf. manyur akārṣīn manyuḥ.
manyur akārṣīn namo namaḥ # Tā.10.62.
manyur akārṣīn nāhaṃ karomi manyuḥ karoti manyuḥ kartā manyuḥ kārayitā # MahānU.18.3. See next.
manyur akārṣīn manyuḥ karoti nāhaṃ karomi manyuḥ kartā nāhaṃ kartā manyuḥ kārayitā nāhaṃ kārayitā # Tā.10.62. P: manyur akārṣīt ApDh.1.9.26.13. See prec., and cf. manyunā kṛtaṃ.
manyor mṛdhrasya (HG. mṛddhasya) nāśinī # ApMB.2.22.1b; HG.1.15.3b. See manyoḥ krodhasya.
marutvantam ṛjīṣiṇam # RV.8.76.5a.
marmṛjāno 'vibhiḥ sindhubhir vṛṣā # RV.9.86.11d; SV.2.382d; JB.3.135.
mahaḥ pitur dama āsiñcad agre # RV.3.48.2d.
mahāntaṃ kośam ud acā ni (AVś.AVP. ud acābhi) ṣiñca # RV.5.83.8a; AVś.4.15.16a; AVP.5.7.14a.
mahāhastī dakṣiṇena # RV.8.81.1c; SV.1.167c; 2.78c; VaradapU.1.4c.
ta enasvanto yakṣin bhujema # RV.7.88.6c.
tvā ke cin ni (AVś. ke cid vi) yaman viṃ (SV. ke cin ni yemur in; TA. ke cin nyemur in) na pāśinaḥ # RV.3.45.1c; AVś.7.117.1c; SV.1.246c; 2.1068c; VS.20.53c; TA.1.12.2c.
tvā sūryo 'bhi (KS. sūryaḥ pari; Apś. sūryaḥ parī) tāpsīn māgnir (Apś. mo agnir) vaiśvānaraḥ # VS.13.30; MS.2.7.16: 100.4; KS.39.3; śB.7.5.1.8; Apś.16.25.2.
no rakṣīr dakṣiṇāṃ nīyamānām (AVP. yācamānām) # AVś.5.7.1b; AVP.7.9.1b.
no hāsīn metthito net tvā jahāma # TB.3.7.2.7c; Apś.9.3.1c. See mā no hiṃsīd dhiṃsito, and mā mā hāsīn.
no hiṃsīd dhiṃsito (some mss. insert dadhāmi) na tvā jahāmi # Aś.1.12.37c. See under mā no hāsīn.
mā ke cin nyemur in na pāśinaḥ # TA.1.12.2c.
māṃ prāṇo hāsīn mo apāno 'vahāya parā gāt # AVś.16.4.3.
mā hāsīn (Mś. hāsīr) nāthito net (Mś. na) tvā jahāni (Mś. -mi) # AVś.13.1.12c; KS.35.18c; Mś.3.1.28c. See under mā no hāsīn.
mārutāḥ parjanya ghoṣiṇaḥ pṛthak # AVś.4.15.4b. See parjanya ghoṣiṇaḥ pṛthak.
vaḥ pari ṣṭhāt sarayuḥ purīṣiṇī # RV.5.53.9c.
vaḥ sindhur ni rīramat # RV.5.53.9b.
savyena dakṣiṇam atikrāma (HG. atikrāmīḥ) # GG.2.2.13; HG.1.20.10.
māsīmām ūrjam uta ye bhajante # HG.2.10.6c. See āsīnām ūrjam.
māsma dakṣiṇato vadaḥ # TA.4.32.1b.
māham ṛṣīn mantrakṛto mantrapatīn parādām # TA.4.1.1.
mitrasya ca dakṣiṇāḥ # AVP.2.85.4b.
mukṣījayeva padim utsināti # RV.1.125.2d; N.5.19d.
mugdhāya vainaṃśināya svāhā # VS.9.20; 18.28; śB.5.2.1.2.
muniṃ nagnaṃ kṛṇvatīr moghahāsinam # AVP.12.8.5b.
memaṃ prāṇo hāsīn mo apānaḥ # AVś.2.28.3c; 7.53.4a; AVP.1.12.4c.
mo asmākam ṛṣīṇām # RV.5.65.6d.
ya āvahad uśīnarāṇyā anaḥ # RV.10.59.10b.
ya āsiñcanti rasam oṣadhīṣu # AVś.4.27.2b. See ye vā siñcantu.
ya oṣadhīḥ sacate yaś ca sindhūn # AVś.12.3.50b.
yaḥ prajānām ekarāṇ mānuṣīṇām # TA.3.15.2c.
yaḥ prathamo dakṣiṇayā rarādha # RV.10.107.6d.
yaḥ prathamo dakṣiṇām āvivāya # RV.10.107.5d.
yaṃ viśve devāḥ smaram asiñcann apsv antaḥ # AVś.6.132.2a.
yajamāne sunvati dakṣiṇāvati # RV.8.96.2c; AVś.20.55.3c.
yajāmaha indraṃ vajradakṣiṇam # RV.10.23.1a; SV.1.334a; Aś.7.11.38. Ps: yajāmaha indram śś.12.3.8; yajāmahe Svidh.1.3.9; 3.9.1. Designated as vaimadyaḥ (sc. ṛcaḥ) AB.6.19.9.
yajña āyuṣmān sa dakṣiṇābhir āyuṣmān # AVP.7.14.6; KS.11.7; PG.1.16.6; ApMB.2.14.7 (ApG.6.15.12). P: yajña āyuṣmān sa dakṣiṇābhiḥ TS.2.3.10.3. See next.
yajña āyus tasya dakṣiṇā āyuṣkṛtaḥ # MS.2.3.4: 31.14. See prec.
yajñaḥ payo dakṣiṇā doho asya # AVś.4.11.4d; AVP.3.25.2d.
yajñaś ca tvā dakṣiṇā ca dakṣiṇe saṃdhau gopāyetām # PG.3.4.11.
yajñaś ca tvā dakṣiṇā ca śrīṇītām # KS.35.11.
yajñaś ca dakṣiṇā (ApMB. -ṇāś) ca (ApMB. ca dakṣiṇe) # śG.3.3.4; ApMB.2.15.7 (ApG.7.17.6).
yajñāya sam anaman tasmai dakṣiṇābhiḥ sam anaman # AVP.5.35.6.
yajñe dakṣiṇāyāṃ varcaḥ # AVP.2.34.3c.
yajño dakṣiṇataḥ smṛtaḥ # GB.2.2.5b.
yajño dakṣiṇābhir ud akrāmat # AVś.19.19.6a; AVP.8.17.6a.
yajño dakṣiṇāyām # KS.34.16.
yajño bṛhaddakṣiṇā (read -dakṣiṇo ?) tvā pipartu # KS.37.9b.
yataḥ kṣaranti sindhavaḥ # KS.36.15b; TB.2.7.7.6b.
yatkāma idam abhiṣiñcāmi vo 'ham # AVś.6.122.5c; 10.9.27c; 11.1.27c.
yat te rudra dakṣiṇā dhanuḥ # TS.5.5.7.3a.
yat pūrtaṃ yāś ca dakṣiṇāḥ # VS.18.64b; śB.9.5.1.49b. See yad dattaṃ yā.
yat prākṣiṇāḥ pitaraṃ pādagṛhya # RV.4.18.12d.
yatra devānām ṛṣīṇāṃ priyaṃ dhāma tatra ma idam agnihotraṃ gamaya # JB.1.40.
yatra saptarṣīn para ekam ahuḥ # TS.4.6.2.1d; KS.18.1d. See yatrā etc.
yatrā naro marutaḥ siñcathā madhu # AVś.6.22.2d; TS.3.1.11.8d.
yatrā sapta ṛṣīn para ekam āhuḥ # RV.10.82.2d; VS.17.26d; MS.2.10.3d: 134.4; N.10.26d. See yatra etc.
yat samudre yat sindhau # AVP.9.7.11c.
yathāgne devā ṛbhavo manīṣiṇaḥ # AVP.5.17.3a.
yathā patanti pakṣiṇaḥ # AVś.1.11.6b.
yathāparv asinā mābhi maṃsthāḥ # AVś.9.5.4b. Cf. prec.
yathā yajñāya dakṣiṇābhiḥ samanaman # AVP.5.35.6b.
yathā vātena prakṣīṇāḥ # AVś.10.3.15a.
yad atra riptaṃ rasinaḥ sutasya # VS.19.35a; KS.38.2a; śB.12.8.1.5; TB.2.6.3.2a; Aś.3.9.5a. Ps: yad atra riptam Apś.19.8.11; yad atra Kś.19.3.14. See next.
yad atra śiṣṭaṃ rasinaḥ sutasya # MS.2.3.8a: 36.9; 3.11.7a: 151.4; KS.17.19a; AB.7.33.3a; 8.20.4a; TB.1.4.2.3a; Apś.19.3.4a. P: yad atra śiṣṭam Mś.5.2.4.29. See prec.
yad ahaṃ devayajanaṃ veda tasmiṃs tvā devayajana ā kṣiṇomi (ṣB. tasmiṃs tvā vṛścāni) # ṣB.2.10; Apś.10.2.10.
yad āsiñcā oṣadhībhiḥ punītāt # RV.10.30.5d.
yadi dakṣiṇato vadāt # TA.4.32.1c.
yadīme keśino janāḥ # AVś.14.2.59a. P: yadīme keśinaḥ Kauś.79.30.
yad dattaṃ yā ca dakṣiṇā # TS.5.7.7.2b. See yat pūrtaṃ.
yad devānāṃ cakṣuṣa āgasīnam # AVP.1.81.3c. Cf. next.
yad yogyā aśnavaithe ṛṣīṇām # RV.7.70.4b.
yaṃ devāḥ smaram asiñcann apsv antaḥ # AVś.6.132.1a.
yan maṇḍūkāḥ prāvṛṣīṇaṃ babhūva # RV.7.103.7d.
yan me 'gadāyuṣaḥ parāg ito 'gāt tāṃ te 'gada dakṣiṇāṃ nayāmi # Kś.12.2.18.
yamaṃ viṣṇuṃ ca dakṣiṇe # AG.1.2.2d (crit. notes).
yamanetrebhyo devebhyo dakṣiṇāsadbhyaḥ svāhā # VS.9.35; śB.5.2.4.5.
yamāya dakṣiṇātsade (KS. -sade rakṣoghne; AVP. dakṣiṇāsade rakṣoghne) svāhā # AVP.2.54.2; MS.2.6.3: 65.11; KS.15.2. Cf. yamāya savitre.
yamāya savitre varuṇāya bṛhaspataye duvasvate rakṣoghne svāhā # TS.1.8.7.2. Cf. yamāya dakṣiṇāt-.
yam indrāgnī smaram asiñcatām apsv antaḥ # AVś.6.132.4a.
yam indrāṇī smaram asiñcad apsv antaḥ # AVś.6.132.3a.
yaṃ mitrāvaruṇau smaram asiñcatām apsv antaḥ # AVś.6.132.5a.
yayā sve pātre siñcasa ut # RV.10.105.10c.
yaśo yajñasya dakṣiṇām # TB.2.4.6.7b. See diśo yajñasya.
yasminn enam abhyaṣiñcanta devāḥ # TB.3.1.2.11b.
yasya te sapta sindhavaḥ # RV.8.69.12b; AVś.20.92.9b; MS.4.7.8b: 104.11; N.5.27b.
yasya śuṣkāt sindhavaḥ # RVKh.7.55.3c.
yasyāṃ samudra uta sindhur āpaḥ # AVś.12.1.3a.
yaḥ sapta sindhūṃr adadhāt pṛthivyām # MS.4.14.13a: 237.4; TB.2.8.3.8a.
yaḥ suṣavyaḥ sudakṣiṇaḥ # RV.8.33.5a.
imā antaḥ puruṣa āpas te me hotrāśaṃsinas te mopahvayantām # ṣB.2.7.
imā antaś cakṣuṣy āpas te me hotrāśaṃsinas te mopahvayantām # ṣB.2.6.
yāḥ kāś ca sindhuṃ pravahanti nadyaḥ # N.14.34b.
guṅgūr yā sinīvālī # RV.2.32.8a.
dakṣiṇataḥ yā paścāt yottarataḥ yopariṣṭād vidyud āpatat taṃ ta etenāvayaje svāhā # TA.4.14.1.
dasrā sindhumātarā # RV.1.46.2a; SV.2.1079a.
yāṃ dvipādaḥ pakṣiṇaḥ saṃpatanti # AVś.12.1.51a.
yābhir indram abhyaṣiñcat prajāpatiḥ # AB.8.7.3a.
yābhir mitrāvaruṇāv (MS.KS. -ṇā) abhyaṣiñcan # AVP.14.1.6c; VS.10.1c; TS.1.8.11.1c; MS.2.6.8c: 68.10; KS.15.6c; śB.5.3.4.3.
yābhyāṃ kusindhaṃ sudṛḍhaṃ babhūva # AVś.10.2.3d.
yām aśvināsiñcatām # AVP.8.12.2c.
yām asiñcan saudhanvanāḥ # AVP.8.12.2a.
yām udājan ṛṣayo manīṣiṇaḥ # AVP.9.19.6a.
yām ṛṣayo mantrakṛto manīṣiṇaḥ # TB.2.8.8.5a.
yāṃ māyābhir anvacaran manīṣiṇaḥ # AVś.12.1.8b.
yāvac ca sapta sindhavo vitasthire (TS. -tasthuḥ) # VS.38.26b; TS.3.2.6.1b. See yāvat sapta, and yāvad vā.
yāvatīnāṃ-yāvatīnāṃ va aiṣamo lakṣaṇam akāriṣaṃ bhūyasīnāṃ-bhūyasīnāṃ va uttarām-uttarāṃ samāṃ kriyāsam # SMB.1.8.7. See next but one.
yāvatīnām idaṃ karomi (śG. kariṣyāmi) bhūyasīnām uttarāṃ (śG. -māṃ) samāṃ kriyāsam # MS.4.2.9: 31.4; Mś.9.5.6.8; śG.3.10.2. See prec. but one.
yāvat sapta sindhavo vitaṣṭhire # AVś.4.6.2b. See under yāvac ca.
yāvad vā sapta sindhavo vitaṣṭhuḥ (AVP.5.27.3b, mahitvā) # AVP.5.8.1b; 5.27.3b. See under yāvac ca.
yās te rudra dakṣiṇataḥ senās tābhya eṣa balis tābhyas te namaḥ # PG.3.8.11.
yuktas te astu dakṣiṇaḥ # RV.1.82.5a; śG.1.15.8.
yuktā mātāsīd dhuri dakṣiṇāyāḥ # RV.1.164.9a; AVś.9.9.9a.
yukṣvā hi keśinā harī # RV.1.10.3a; VS.8.34a; śB.4.5.3.10a. P: yukṣvā hi Kś.12.5.2. See yuṅkṣvā etc.
yuṅkṣvā hi keśinā harī # SV.2.696a. See yukṣvā etc.
yunajmi te brahmaṇā keśinā harī # RV.1.82.6a; Aś.6.11.9. P: yunajmi te śś.8.8.6.
yuvam etaṃ cakrathuḥ sindhuṣu plavam # RV.1.182.5a.
yūyaṃ vṛṣṭiṃ varṣayathā purīṣiṇaḥ # RV.5.55.5b; TS.2.4.8.2b; KS.11.9b; 30.4b. See divo vṛṣṭiṃ etc.
ye agnayaḥ pāñcajanyāḥ (Mś. purīṣiṇaḥ) # VS.18.67a; śB.9.5.1.53a; Mś.6.2.6.26a. P: ye agnayaḥ Kś.18.6.23. See ye 'gnayaḥ purīṣyāḥ.
Dictionary of Sanskrit Search
"sin" has 278 results
uccaritapradhvaṃsinvanishing immediately after utterance. See उच्चरित.
pradhvaṃsindisappearing; confer, compare उच्चरितप्रध्वंसिनोनुबन्धाः Vyadi Pari. ll.
prasādavāsinyāyainclusion of a thing even though it possesses an additional factor, or consideration, other than what is referred to; cf प्रासादवासिन्यायेन ग्रहणं भवति । तद्यथा केचित्त् प्रासादवासिनः । केचिद् भूमिवासिनः । केचिदुभयवासिन: । ये प्रासादवासिनः गृह्यन्ते ते प्रसादवासिग्रहणेन । ये भूमिवासिनः गृह्यन्ते ते भूमिवासिग्रहणेन । ये उभयवासिनः गृह्यन्ते ते प्रासादवासिग्रहणेन भूमिवासिग्रहणेन च । Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. I. 1.8.
a(1)the first letter of the alphabet in Sanskrit and its derived languages, representing the sound a (अ): (2) the vowel a (अ) representing in grammatical treatises, except when Prescribed as an affix or an augment or a substitute,all its eighteen varieties caused by accentuation or nasalisation or lengthening: (3) personal ending a (अ) of the perfeminine. second.pluraland first and third person.singular.; (4) kṛt affix c (अ) prescribed especially after the denominative and secondary roots in the sense of the verbal activity e. g. बुभुक्षा, चिन्ता, ईक्षा, चर्चा et cetera, and othersconfer, compare अ प्रत्ययात् et cetera, and others (P.III 3.102-106); (5) sign of the aorist mentioned as añ (अङ्) or cañ (चङ्) by Pāṇini in P. III i.48 to 59 exempli gratia, for example अगमत्, अचीकरत्; (6) conjugational sign mentioned as śap (शप्) or śa (श) by Pāṇini in P. III.1.68, 77. exempli gratia, for example भवति, तुदति et cetera, and others; (7) augment am (अम्) as prescribed by P. VI.1.58; exempli gratia, for example द्रष्टा, द्रक्ष्यति; (8) augment aṭ (अट्) prefixed to a root in the imperfeminine. and aorist tenses and in the conditional mood e. g. अभवत्, अभूत्, अभविष्यत् confer, compare P. VI.4.71; (8) kṛt affix a (अ) prescribed as अङ्, अच्, अञ्, अण्, अन्, अप्, क, ख, घ, ञ, ड् , ण, et cetera, and others in the third Adhyāya of Pāṇini's Pāṇini's Aṣṭādhyāyī.; (9) taddhita affix. affix a (अ) mentioned by Pāṇini as अच्, अञ् अण्, अ et cetera, and others in the fourth and the fifth chapters of the Pāṇini's Aṣṭādhyāyī. of Pāṇini; (10) the samāsānta affix a (अ), as also stated in the form of the samāsānta affixes (डच् , अच्, टच्, ष्, अष् and अञ्) by Pāṇini in V.4.73 to 121;(11) substitute a (अश्) accented grave for इदम before case-affixes beginning with the inst. instrumental case. case: (12) remnant (अ) of the negative particle नञ् after the elision of the consonant n (न्) by नलोपो नञः P. vi.3.73.
akathitanot mentioned by any other case-relation such as अपादान, संप्रदान and अधिकरण; stated with respect to the indirect object, governed by roots possessing two objects such as दुह्, याच् and others, which in the passive woice is put in the nominative case. The in-direct object is called akathita because in some cases there exists no other case-relation as, for example, in पौरवं गां याचते or भिक्षते, or माणवकं पन्थानं पृच्छति; while, in the other cases, the other case-relations (with the activity expressed by the verb) are wilfully suppressed or ignored although they exist, as for instance in गां दोग्धि पयः, अन्ववरुणद्धि गां व्रजम्; see अकथितं च P.1.4.51 and the Mahābhāṣya thereon.
akārakanot causing any verbal activity; different from the kārakas or instruments of action such as the agent, the object, the instrument, the recipient (संप्रदान), the separated (अपादान) and the location, (अधिकरण) confer, compare Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I.4.23, 29 and 5l and on II.3.1.
aṅkitanot possessing the mute letter k (क्) or g (ग्) orṅ ( ङ् ) and hence not preventing the guṇa and vṛddhi substitutes for the preceding vowel, if they occur. e. g. मृजेर ङ्कित्सु प्रत्ययेषु मृजिप्रसङगे मार्जिः साधुर्भुवति M.Bh. on P. I.I.I Vart.10.
aṅgavṛttaan operation prescribed in the section named aṅgādhikara, comprising the fourth quarter of the sixth book and the whole of the seventh book of Pāṇini.
at(1)tech. term in Pāṇini's grammar for short अ, cf तपरस्तत्कालस्य P. I. 1. 70; अदेङ् गुणः P.I.1.2; (2) personal ending अ for इ ( इट् ) of the Ist person. singular. or Ātmanep. Ātmanepada in the Potential, P III. 4. 106; (3) caseaffix in the case of युष्मद् and अस्मद् for ablative case. singular. and plural P.VII. 1.31,32: (4) tad-affix अत् (अ) prescribed after किम् in the sense of the locative case case before which किम् is changed to कु, क्व being the taddhita affix. formation; confer, compare P. V.3.12 and VII.2.105:(5) substitute अत्(शतृ) for लट् forming the present and future participles in the Parasmaipada. active voice confer, compare लटः शतृशानचौ. P.III. 2.124 and लृटः सद्वा P. III.3.14.
atikramapassing over a word in the क्रमपाठ without repeating it; passing beyond, confer, compare अतिक्रम्य परिग्रहः Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) X.7, which means catching a word for repetition by coming back after passing over it, e. g. इन्द्राग्नी अपात् । इन्द्राग्नी इति इन्द्राग्नी । or अनु दक्षि । दक्षि दावने | दक्षीति दक्षि ।
atiśāyanaexcellence, surpassing; the same as अतिशय in Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.V. 2 confer, compare अतिशायने तमबिष्ठनौ P. V. 3.55, also confer, compare भूमनिन्दाप्रशंसासु नित्ययोगेऽतिशायने । संसर्गेऽ स्तिविवक्षायां भवन्ति मतुबादय: Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on V.2.94, where अतिशायन means अतिशाय. Patañjali, commenting on P. V.3.55 clearly remarks that for अतिशय, or for अतिशयन, the old grammarians, out of fancy only, used the term अतिशायन as it was a current term in popular usage; confer, compare देश्याः सूत्रनिबन्धाः क्रियन्ते यावद् ब्रूयात् प्रकर्षे अतिशय इति तावदतिशायन इति Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on , P. V.3.55.
atisvārya(अतिस्वार also)name of the seventh musical note in the singing of Sāman. confer, compareक्रष्टुप्रथमद्वितीयतृतीयचतुर्थमन्द्रातिस्वार्याः Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.XXIII. 13.
atvatpossessing or having a short अ vowel in it; archaic form used by Pāṇini in उपदेशेsत्वतः (P. VII. 2.62) instead of अद्वत् the correct one; confer, compare छन्दोवत्सूत्राणि भवन्ति Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I.1.1 and I.4.3.
adviyoniliterally not made up of two elements, and hence, produced with a single effort, an expression used for simple vowels ( समानाक्षर ) such as अ, इ, उ, ऋ, लृ and simple consonants क्, ख्, ग् et cetera, and others as distinguished from diphthongs ( सन्ध्यक्षर ) such as ए, ऐ, ओ, औ and conjunct consonants क्व, ध्र , et cetera, and others which appear to have been termed द्वियोनि confer, compare अपृक्तमेकाक्षरमद्वियोनि यत् R.Pr.XI.3.
adhikāragoverning rule consisting of a word (exempli gratia, for example प्रत्ययः, धातोः, समासान्ताः et cetera, and others) or words (exempli gratia, for example ङ्याप्प्रातिपदिकात्, सर्वस्य द्वे et cetera, and others) which follows or is taken as understood in every following rule upto a particular limit. The meaning of the word अधिकार is discussed at length by Patañjali in his Mahābhāṣya on II.1.1, where he has given the difference between अधिकार and परिभाषा; confer, compare अधिकार: प्रतियोगं तस्यानिर्देशार्थ इति योगे योगे उपतिष्ठते। परिभाषा पुनरेकदेशस्था सती सर्वं शास्त्रमभिज्वलयति प्रदीपवत् । See also Mahābhāṣya on I.3.11, I. 4.49 and IV. I.83. The word or wording which is to repeat in.the subsequent rules is believed to be shown by Pāṇini by characterizing it with a peculiarity of utterance known as स्वरितोच्चार or स्वरितत्वेन उच्चारणम्. The word which is repeated in the following Sūtras is stated to be अधिकृत. The Śabda Kaustubha defines adhikāra as एकंत्रोपात्तस्यान्यत्र व्यापार: अधिकारः Śab. Kaus. on P.1.2.65. Sometimes the whole rule is repeated e. g. प्रत्यय: P.III.1.1, अङ्गस्य P.VI.4.1 समासान्ताः P.V.4.68 while on some occasions a part only of it is seen repeatedition The repetition goes on upto a particular limit which is stated as in असिद्धवदत्राभात् P.VI.4.22, प्राग्रीश्वरान्निपाताः P.I.4.56. Many times the limit is not stated by the author of the Sūtras but it is understood by virtue of a counteracting word occurring later on. On still other occasions, the limit is defined by the ancient traditional interpreters by means of a sort of convention which is called स्वरितत्वप्रतिज्ञा. This अधिकार or governance has its influence of three kinds: ( 1 ) by being valid or present in all the rules which come under its sphere of influence, e. g. स्त्रियाम् or अङ्गस्य; (2) by showing additional properties e. g. the word अपादान being applied to cases where there is no actual separation as in सांकाश्यकेभ्यः पाटलिपुत्रका अभिरूपतराः: (3) by showing additional force such as setting aside even subsequent rules if opposingular. These three types of the influence which a word marked with स्वरित and hence termed अधिकार possesses are called respectively अधिकारगति, अधिक क्रार्य and अधिक कार. For details see M.Bh. on I.3.11. This अधिकार or governing rule exerts its influence in three ways: (1) generally by proceeding ahead in subsequent rules like the stream of a river, (2)sometimes by jumps like a frog omitting a rule or more, and (3)rarely by proceeding backward with a lion's glance; confer, compare सिंहावलोकितं चैव मण्डूकप्लुतमेव च ।; गड्गाप्रवाहवच्चापि अधिकारास्त्रिधा मताः ॥
anaḍ(1)substitute अन् as Samāsānta at the end of a Bahuvrīhi compound in the feminine for the last letter of the word ऊधस् and for that of धनुस् in all genders exempli gratia, for example कुण्डोघ्नी (by applying ई to कुण्डोधन्), शार्ङ्गधन्वा, अधिज्यधन्वा; confer, compare P V.4.131, 132; (2) substitute अन् for the last letter of the words अस्थि, दधि et cetera, and others before the affixes of the instrumental and the following cases beginning with a vowel e. g. अस्थ्ना, दध्ना, अक्ष्णा et cetera, and others confer, compare P. VII. 1.75; (3) substitute अन् for the last letter of the word सखि, of words ending in ऋ,as also of उशनस् and others before the nominative singular. affix सु. e. g. सखा, कर्ता, उशना confer, compare P. VII.1.93, 94.
anackapossessing no अच् or vowel in it. cf इन्द्रे द्वौ अचौ, एको यस्येतिलोपेनापहृतोऽपर एकादेशेन ततः अनच्कः इन्द्रशब्दः संपन्नः confer, compare Paribhāṣenduśekhara of Nāgeśa. on Par. 52.: M.Bh. on I. 4.2 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 22.
anarthaka(1)without any signification;literally having no meaning of themselves, id est, that ispossessing a meaning only when used in company with other words or parts of words which bear an independent sense;(the word is used generally in connection with prepositions); exempli gratia, for example अधिपरी अनर्थकौ P.1.4.93, confer, compare अनर्थान्तरवाचिनावनर्थकौ । धातुनोक्तां क्रियामाहतुः । तदविशिष्टं भवति यथा शङ्के पय: ॥ Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P.I.4.93; confer, compare न निर्बद्धा उपसर्गा अर्थान्निराहुरिति शाकटायनः Nirukta of Yāska.I. 1.3: confer, compare also अनर्थकौ अनर्थान्तरवाचिनौ Kāś. on I.4.93, explained as अनर्थान्तरवाचित्वादनर्थकावित्युक्तम् न त्वर्थाभावादिति दर्शयति by न्यासकार; (2) meaningless, purposeless: confer, compare प्रमाणभूत आचार्यो दर्भपवित्रपाणिः महता यत्नेन सूत्रं प्रणयति स्म । तत्राशक्यं वर्णेनाप्यनर्थकेन भवितुं किं पुनरियता सूत्रेण M.Bh. on I.1.1, as also सामर्थ्ययोगान्न हि किंचिदस्मिन् पश्यामि शास्त्रे यदनर्थकं स्यात् M.Bh. on P. VI.I.77. See for details M.Bh. on I.2.45 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 12: III.1.77 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 2 and Kaiyaṭa and Mahābhāṣya-Pradīpoddyota by Nāgeśa.thereon; (3) possessed of no sense absolutely as some nipātas केचन निपाताः सार्थकाः केचन च निरर्थकाः U1. varia lectio, another reading, on Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XII.9; निपातस्यानर्थकस्यापि प्रातिपदिकत्वम् P. I. 2.45 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini).12 confer, compare also जन्या इति निपातनानर्थक्यं P. IV. 4.82. Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 1, एकागारान्निपातनानर्थक्यं P. V.1.113 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 1, also 114 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini).1.
analvidhiopp. of अल्विधि; an operation not concerning a single letter, exempli gratia, for example स्थानिवदादेशोsनल्विधौ P.I. 1.56 and Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). thereon; confer, compare स्थानिवदादेशो ह्यवर्णविधौ Kātantra vyākaraṇa Sūtra.Pari.39.
anāpyahaving or possessing no āpya or object; intransitive (root): confer, compare चालशब्दार्थाद् अनाप्याद् युच् Cāndra I.2 97 standing for चलनशब्दार्थाद् अकर्मकाद् युच् P. III.2.148.
animittaot serving as a cause, not possessing a causal relation; e. g. संनिपातलक्षणे विधिरनिमित्तं तद्विघातस्य Paribhāṣenduśekhara of Nāgeśa. Pari. 85. See also Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I.1.39.
anirdiṣṭārthawhose sense has not been specifically stated ; the word is used with reference to such affixes as are not prescribed in any specific sense or senses and hence as are looked upon as possessing the sense which the base after which they are prescribed has got: confer, compare अनिर्दिष्टार्थाः प्रत्ययाः स्वार्थे भवन्ति -affixes, to which no meaning has been assigned, convey the meaning of the bases to which they are added; confer, compare Paribhāṣenduśekhara of Nāgeśa. Pari. 113; confer, compare also Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on III.2.4, III, 2.67, III.3.19, III. 4.9, VI.1.162.
anudāttanon-udatta, absence of the acute accent;one of the Bāhyaprayatnas or external efforts to produce sound. This sense possibly refers to a stage or a time when only one accent, the acute or उदात्त was recognized just as in English and other languages at present, This udatta was given to only one vowel in a single word (simple or compound) and all the other vowels were uttered accentless.id est, that is अनुदात्त. Possibly with this idea.in view, the standard rule 'अनुदात्तं पदमेकवर्जम्'* was laid down by Panini. P.VI.1.158. As, however, the syllable, just preceding the accented ( उदात्त ) syllable, was uttered with a very low tone, it was called अनुदात्ततर, while if the syllables succeeding the accented syllable showed a gradual fall in case they happened to be consecutive and more than two, the syllable succeeding the उदात्त was given a mid-way tone, called स्वरितः confer, compare उदात्तादनुदात्तस्य स्वरितः. Thus, in the utterance of Vedic hymns the practice of three tones उदात्त, अनुदात्त and स्वरित came in vogue and accordingly they are found defined in all the Prātiśākhya and grammar works;confer, compare उच्चैरुदात्तः,नीचैरनुदात्तः समाहारः स्वरितः P.I.2.29-31, T.Pr.I.38-40, V.Pr.I.108-110, Anudātta is defined by the author of the Kāśikāvṛtti as यस्मिन्नुच्चार्यमाणे गात्राणामन्ववसर्गो नाम शिथिलीभवनं भवति, स्वरस्य मृदुता, कण्ठविवरस्य उरुता च स: अनुदात्तः confer, compare अन्ववसर्गो मार्दवमुरुता स्वस्येति नीचैःकराणि शब्दस्य Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I.2.29,30. Cfeminine. also उदात्तश्चानुदात्तश्च स्वरितश्च त्रयः स्वराः । अायामविश्रम्भोक्षपैस्त उच्यन्तेSक्षराश्रयाः ॥ Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) III.1. The term anudātta is translated by the word 'grave' as opposed to acute' (udātta,) and 'circumflex' (svarita); (2) a term applied to such roots as have their vowel अनुदात्त or grave, the chief characteristic of such roots being the non-admission of the augment इ before an ārdhadhātuka affix placed after them. ( See अनिट्, ).
antaratamavery close or very cognate being characterized (l) by the same place of utterance, or (2) by possessing the same sense, or (3) by possessing the same qualities, or (4) by possessing the same dimension ; cf स्थानेन्तरतमः P.I. I.50 and Kāś. thereon अान्तर्यं स्थानार्थगुणुप्रमाणतः स्थानतः दण्डाग्रम् , अर्थतः वतण्डी चासौ युवतिश्च वातण्ड्ययुवतिः । गुणतः पाकः, त्यागः, रागः । प्रमाणतः अमुष्मै अमूभ्याम् ॥
antavadbhāvasupposed condition of being at the end obtained by the single substitute(एकादेश) for the final of the preceding and the initial of the succeeding word. confer, compare अन्तादिवच्च । योयमेकादेशः स पूर्वस्यान्तवत् परस्थादिवत् स्यात् । Sid. Kau. on अन्तादिवच्च P.VI. 1.84.
antādivadbhāvacondition, attributed to a single substitute for the final of the preceding and initial of the succeeding word, of being looked upon either as the final of the preceding word or as the initial of the succeeding word but never as both (the final as well as the initial) at one and the same time; confer, compare उभयत आश्रये नान्तादिवत् Sīr. Pari 39 also Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I.2.48.
apṛktaliterally unmixed with any (letter); a technical term for an affix consisting of one phonetic element, id est, that is of a single letter. confer, compare अपृक्त एकाल्प्रत्ययः P. I.2.41.
apoddhāradisintegration of the constituent elements of a word; analysis; अपोद्धार पृथक्करणम् commentary on Vāk. Pad. II. 449: confer, compare अपोद्धारपदार्था ये ये चार्थाः स्थितलक्षणः Vāk. Pad.I.24.
appayadīkṣitaअप्पदीक्षित A famous versatile writer of the sixteenth century A. D. (1530-1600 ), son of रङ्गराजाध्वरीन्द्र a Dravid Brāhmaṇa. He wrote more than 60 smaller or greater treatises mainly on Vedānta, Mimāṁsā, Dharma and Alaṁkāra śāstras; many of his works are yet in manuscript form. The Kaumudi-prakāśa and Tiṅantaśeṣasaṁgraha are the two prominent grammatical works written by him. Paṇdit Jagannātha spoke very despisingly of him.
abhāṣitapuṃskathat which does not convey a masculine sense; a word which is not declined in the masculine gender; a word possessing only the feminine gender e.gखट्वा, लता et cetera, and othersconfer, compare अभाषितपुंस्काच्च P. VII. 3.48.
abhighātadepression or sinking of the voice as required for the utterance of a circumflex vowel.
abhinidhānaliterally that which is placed near or before; the first of the doubled class consonants; a mute or sparṣa consonant arising from doubling and inserted before a mute; confer, compare अघोषादूष्मणः परः प्रथमः अभिनिधानः स्पर्शपरात्तस्य सस्थानः ( Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.XIV. 9. ) explained by त्रिभाष्यरत्न as स्पर्शपरादघोषादूष्मणः परः प्रथम आगमस्तस्य स्पर्शस्य समानस्थानः अभिनिधानो भवति । अभिनिधीयते इत्यभिनिधानः आरोपणीयः इत्यर्थः । यथा यः क्कामयेत अश्मन्नूर्जम् । यः प्पाप्मना । The Ṛk. prātiśākhya explains the term अभिनिधान somewhat differently; confer, compare अभिनिधानं कृतसंहितानां स्पर्शन्ति:स्थानामपवाद्य रेफम् । संघारणं संवरणं श्रुतेश्च स्पर्शोदयानामपि चावसाने Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) VI. 5, explained by उव्वट as स्पर्शपराणां स्पर्शानां रेफं वर्जयित्वा अन्तःस्थानां च वर्णानां कृतसंहितानां च सतां संधारणं वर्णश्रुतेश्च संवरणं भवति । तदेतद् अभिनिधानं नाम । यथा उष मा षड् द्वा द्वा । ऋ. सं ८।६८।१४ इह षड् इत्यत्र अभिनिधानम् ॥ अभिनिघान possibly according to उव्वट here means the first of the doubled letter which, although the second letter is attached to it, is separately uttered with a slight pause after it. अभिनिधान means, in short, something like 'suppression.' The Ṛk. Tantra takes a still wider view and explains अभिनिधान as the first of a doubled consonant, cf ; अभिनिधानः । क्रमजं च पूर्वान्ततस्वरं भवति । Ṛktantra Prātiśākhya. 21.
abhyāhataomission of any sound; a fault of utterance. अम् (1)a technical brief term in Panini's grammar including vowels, semivowels, the letter ह् and nasals; (2) a significant term for the accusative case showing change or substitution or modification: confer, compare अं विकारस्य Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.I.28 explained as अमिति शब्दे विकारस्याख्या भवति । अमिति द्वितीय विभक्तेरुपलक्षणम् । (3) augment अ applied to the penultimate vowel of सृज् & दृश् (P. VI.1.58, 59 and VII.1.99) (4) substitute tor Ist person. singular. affix मिप्, by P.III.4.101 (5) Acc. singular. case affix अम् .
ayāc,ayāṭsubstitutes for inst. sing affix टा in Vedic literature e. g. स्वप्नया, नावया.
ardhamātrāhalf of a mātra or 'mora'., confer, compare अर्धमात्रालाघवेन पुत्रोत्सवं मन्यन्ते वैयाकरणाः Par. Śekh. Pari. 122, signifying that not a single element of utterance in Pāṇini's grammar is superfluous. In other words, the wording of the Sūtras of Pāṇini is the briefest possible, not being capable of reduction by even half a mora.
alpragrahaṇa(1)the word अल् actually used in Pāṇini's rule e. g. अपृक्त एकाल् प्रत्ययः P.I.2.41.(2) the wording as अल् or wording by mention of a single letter exempli gratia, for example अचि श्रुधातुभ्रुवांय्वो P, VI.4.77.
allopaelision or omission of a single phonetic element or letter; confer, compare अल्लोपोsनः P. VI.4.134.
alvidhian operation prescribed with reference to one single letter; confer, compare स्थानिवदादेशोs नल्विधौ P.I.1.56.
avarṇathe letter अ; the first letter of the Sanskrit alphabet, comprising all its varieties caused by grades, ( ह्रस्व, दीर्घ, प्लुत) or accents of nasalization. The word वर्ण is used in the neuter gender in the Mahābhāṣya; confer, compare सर्वमुखस्थानमवर्णम् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). I.1.9, मा कदाचिदवर्णं भूत् M.Bh. I.1.48 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 1; cf also Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I.1.50 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 18 and I.1.51 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 2: confer, compare also ह्रस्वमवर्णं प्रयोगे संवृतम् Sīradeva's ParibhāṣāvṛttiPari. 17. 6
avaśiṣṭaliṅga(v.1. अविशिष्टलिङ्ग)a term occurring in the liṅgānuśāsana meaning 'possessed of such genders as have not been mentioned already either singly or by combination' id est, that is possessed of all genders.Under अवशिष्टलिङ्ग are mentioned indeclinables, numerals ending in ष् or न् , adjectives, words ending with kṛtya affixes id est, that is potential passive participles, pronouns, words ending with the affix अन in the sense of an instrument or a location and the words कति and युष्मद् (See पाणिनीय-लिङ्गानुशासन Sūtras 182-188).
(1)Pratyāhāra or a brief term standing for all vowels, semivowels, and the fifth, fourth and third of the class-consonants; all letters excepting the surds and sibilants; (2) substitute अ for the word इदम् before affixes of cases beginning with the instrumental, and for एतद् before the taddhita affix. affixes त्र and तस्; see P.II.4.32 and 33; (3) substitute अ for the genitive case singular. case-affix ङस् after the words युष्मद् and अस्मद्; see P.VII.1.27.
as(1)case affix of the nominative and accusative plural and the ablative and genitive singular (जस् , शस्, ङसि and ङस् ) (2) taddhita affix अस् ( असि ) added to पूर्व, अधर and अवर, by P.V.3.39: (3) compoundending अस् ( असिच् ) applied to the words प्रजा and मेधा standing at the end of a Bahuvrīhi compound (P.V.4.122): (4) Uṇādi affix अस् prescribed by the rule सर्वधातुभ्योऽसुन् and subsequent rules (628-678) to form words such as मनस्,सरस् et cetera, and others(5) ending syllable अस्, with or without sense, of words in connection with which special operations are given in grammar; confer, compare P.VI.4.14; confer, compare also अनिनस्मन्ग्रहणान्यर्थवता चानर्थकेन च तदन्तविधिं प्रयोजयन्ति Par.Śek. Pari. 16.
asaṃkhyanot possessing any notion of number; the word is used in connection with avyayas or indeclinables; यथैव हि अलिङ्गमव्ययमेवमसंख्यमपि Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on II.4.82.
asiddhainvalid; of suspended validity for the time being: not functioning for the time being. The term is frequently used in Pāṇini's system of grammar in connection with rules or operations which are prevented, or held in suspense, in connection with their application in the process of the formation of a word. The term (असिद्ध) is also used in connection with rules that have applied or operations that have taken place, which are, in certain cases, made invalid or invisible as far as their effect is concerned and other rules are applied or other operations are allowed to take place, which ordinarily have been prevented by those rules which are made invalid had they not been invalidatedition Pāṇini has laid down this invalidity on three different occasions (1) invalidity by the rule पूर्वत्रासिद्धम् VIII.2.1. which makes a rule or operation in the second, third and fourth quarters of the eighth chapter of the Pāṇini's Aṣṭādhyāyī. invalid when any preceding rule is to be applied, (2) invalidity by the rule असिद्धवदत्राभात् which enjoins mutual invalidity in the case of operations prescribed in the Ābhīya section beginning with the rule असिद्धवत्राभात् (VI. 4.22.) and going on upto the end of the Pāda (VI.4.175), (3) invalidity of the single substitute for two letters, that has already taken place, when ष् is to be substituted for स्, or the letter त् is to be prefixed, confer, compare षत्वतुकोरसिद्धः (VI. 1.86). Although Pāṇini laid down the general rule that a subsequent rule or operation, in case of conflict, supersedes the preceding rule, in many cases it became necessary for him to set, that rule aside, which he did by means of the stratagem of invalidity given a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.. Subsequent grammarians found out a number of additional cases where it became necessary to supersede the subseguent rule which they did by laying down a dictum of invalidity similar to that of Pāṇini. The author of the Vārttikas, hence, laid down the doctrine that rules which are nitya or antaraṅga or apavāda, are stronger than, and hence supersede, the anitya, bahiraṅga and utsarga rules respectively. Later gram marians have laid down in general, the invalidity of the bahiraṅga rule when the antaraṅga rule occurs along with it or subsequent to it. For details see Vol. 7 of Vvyākaraṇa Mahābhāṣya(D. E. Society's edition) pages 217-220. See also Pari. Śek. Pari. 50.
ākinictaddhita affix. affeminine. अाकिन् affixed to the word एक in the sense of 'single,' 'alone'; confer, compare एकादाकिनिच्चासहाये P.V.3.52.
aākhyātavyākaraṇaa treatise on verbs discussing verbal forms by VaṅgaSena.
aāgantukaliterally adventitious, an additional wording generally at the end of roots to show distinctly their form exempli gratia, for example वदि, एधि, सर्ति et cetera, and others; confer, compare इन्धिभवतिभ्यां च P I.2.6: confer, compare also भावलक्षणे स्थेण्कृञ्वदिचरिहृतभिजनिभ्यस्तोमुन्, P.III.4.16, सृपिवृदो. कसुन् P. III.4.17 and a number of other sūtras where इ or तिं is added to the root confer, compare इक्श्तिपौ धातुनिर्देशे, वर्णात्कारः, रादिफः P.III.3.108 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 2.3. 4, where such appendages to be added to the roots or letters are given. The word अागन्तु is an old word used in the Nirukta, but the term आगन्तुक appears to be used for the first time for such forms by Haradatta; confer, compare ह्वरोरिति ह्वृ कौटिल्ये, आगन्तुकेकारे गुणेन निर्देशः Padamañjarī, a commentary on the Kāśikāvṛtti by Haradatta. on VII.2.31. In the traditional oral explanations the second part of a reduplicated word is termed अागन्तुक which is placed second i. e. after the original by virtue of the convention आगन्तूनामन्ते निवेशः, although in fact, it is said to possess the sense of the root in contrast with the first which is called abhyāsa.A nice distinction can, however be drawn between the four kinds of adventitious wordings found in grammar viz.आगन्तु, इत्, अभ्यास and आगम which can be briefly stated as follows; The former two do not form a regular part of the word and are not found in the actual use of the word; besides, they do not possess any sense, while the latter two are found in actual use and they are possessed of sense. Again the agantu word is simply used for facility of understanding exactly and correctly the previous word which is really wanted; the इत् wording, besides serving this purpose, is of use in causing some grammatical operations. अभ्यास, is the first part of the wording which is wholly repeated and it possesses no sense by itself, while, āgama which is added to the word either at the beginning or at the end or inserted in the middle, forms a part of the word and possesses the sense of the word.
ādyantavattvaअाद्यन्तवद्भाव, consideration of a single or solitary letter as the initial or the final one according to requirements for opcrations prescribed for the initial or for the final. Both these notions --the initial and the final-are relative notions, and because they require the presence of an additional letter or letters for the sake of being called initial or final it becomes necessary to prescribe आद्यन्तवद्भाव in the case of a single letter; confer, compareअाद्यन्तवदेकस्मिन् । आदौ इव अन्त इव एकस्मिन्नपि कार्यं भवति । यथा कर्तव्यमित्यत्र प्रत्ययाद्युदात्तत्वं भवति एवमौपगवमित्यत्रापि यथा स्यात् । Kāś. on P.I.1.21 ; confer, compare also अाद्यन्तवच्च । अपृक्तस्य आदिवदन्तवच्च कार्यं भवति । Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.I.55. This अाद्यन्तवद्भाव of Pāṇini is, in fact, a specific application of the general maxim known as vyapadeśivadbhāva by virtue of which "an operation which affects something on account of some special designation, which for certain reasons attaches to the letter, affects likewise that which stands alone;" confer, compare Pari.Śek. Pari. 30.
aāniimp. 1st per.sing affix नि with the augment अा prefixed, which has got its न् changed into ण् by P. VIII.4.16.
āp(1)common term for the feminine. endings टाप्, डाप् and चाप् given by Pāṇini in Adhy. IV, Pāda 1; confer, compare अव्ययादाप्सुपः P. II.4.82. P.IV.1.1.; P.VI.1.68; confer, compare also P.VI.3.63. P.VII.3.44; P.VII.3.106, 116; P.VII.4.15. et cetera, and others; (2) a brief term for case-affixes beginning with the inst. sing and ending with the locative case plural confer, compare अनाप्यकः P. VII.2.112.
ām(1)augment आ prescribed in connection with the words चतुर् and अनडुह् before the case-affixes called सर्वनामस्थान; confer, compare चतुरनडुहोराम् उदात्तः P.VII.1.98; (2) the affix आम् added before लिट् or a perfect termination by rules कास्प्रत्ययादाम् अमन्त्रे लिटि and the following (P. III 1.35-39), as for instance, in कासांचक्रे, ऊहांचक्रे, दयांचक्रे, जागरांचकार, विभयांचकार et cetera, and others; (3) geni. plural caseaffix आम् as in दृषदाम्, शरदाम्, with न् prefixed in रामाणाम् et cetera, and others, and with स् prefixed in सर्र्वेषाम् et cetera, and others; (4) locative case singular. case-affix अाम् substituted for इ (ङि); confer, compare ङेराम् नद्याम्नीभ्यः P.VI.4.116.
aāmantrita(1)a word in the vocative singular. confer, compare सामन्त्रितम् P.II.3.48: a tech. term in Pāṇini's grammar, the peculiar features of which are पराङ्गवद्भाव (confer, compare P.II.1.2), अविद्यमानवद्भाव (confer, compare P.VIII.1.72), द्वित्व (confer, compare P.VIII. 1.8), अद्युदात्तत्व (confer, compare P.VI.1.198), सर्वानुदात्तत्व(confer, compare P.VIII.1.19), splitting of ए into अा and इ, exempli gratia, for example अग्रे into अग्ना ३ इ (confer, compare P.VIII.2.107 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 3); (2) Vocative case, confer, compare ओकार अामन्त्रितजः प्रगृह्यः Ṛk. Prāt. I.28; Vāj. Pr. III.139: II.17: II.24 VI.1.
i(1)the vowel इ, representing all its eighteen forms viz. short, long protracted, acute, grave, circumflex, pure and nasalised; exempli gratia, for example इ in यस्येति च P.VI.4.128;(2) Uṅādi affix ई(3)tad-affix इच्(इ)applied to Bahuvrihi compounds in the sense of exchange of action or as seen in words like द्विदण्डि exempli gratia, for example केशाकेशि, दण्डादण्डि, द्विमुसलि et cetera, and others confer, compare इच् कर्मव्यतिहारे P.V.4. 127,also V.4.128; (4) kṛt (affix). affix कि (इ) confer, compare उपसर्गे घोः किः P.III.3.92; (5) augment इट् (इ); see इट् (6) conjugational affix इट् of the 1st person. singular. or Ātmanep. Ātmanepada
id(1)augment इ prefixed,in general in the case of all roots barring a few roots ending in vowels except ऊ and ऋ and roots शक्, पच्, et cetera, and others, to such affixes of non-conjugational tenses and moods as begin with any consonant except ह् and य्; confer, compare आर्धधातुकस्येड् वलादेः P.VII.2.35 to 78 and its exceptions P.VII.2.8 to 34; (2) personal ending of the third person singular. or Ātmanep. Ātmanepada
it(1)a letter or a group of letters attached to a word which is not seen in actual use in the spoken language: cf अप्रयोगी इत्, Śāk. I.1.5, Hemacandra's Śabdānuśāsana.1.1.37. The इत् letters are applied to a word before it, or after it, and they have got each of them a purpose in grammar viz. causing or preventing certain grammatical operations in the formation of the complete word. Pāṇini has not given any definition of the word इत् , but he has mentioned when and where the vowels and consonants attached to words are to be understood as इत्; (confer, compare उपदेशेजनुनासिक इत् , हलन्त्यम् । et cetera, and others P. I.3.2 to 8) and stated that these letters are to be dropped in actual use, confer, compareP.I.3.9. It appears that grammarians before Pāṇini had also employed such इत् letters, as is clear from some passages in the Mahābhāṣya as also from their use in other systems of grammar as also in the Uṇādi list of affixes, for purposes similar to those found served in Pāṇini 's grammar. Almost all vowels and consonants are used as इत् for different purposes and the इत् letters are applied to roots in the Dhātupāṭha, nouns in the Gaṇapāṭha, as also to affixes, augments and substitutes prescribed in grammar. Only at a few places they are attached to give facility of pronunciation. Sometimes the इत् letters, especially vowels, which are said to be इत्, when uttered as nasalized by Pāṇini, are recognised only by convention; confer, compare प्रतिज्ञानुनासिक्याः पाणिनीयाः(S.K.on P.I.3.2).The word इत्, which literally means going away or disappearing, can be explained as a mute indicatory letter. In Pāṇini's grammar, the mute vowel अ applied to roots indicates the placing of the Ātmanepada affixes after them, if it be uttered as anudātta and of affixes of both the padas if uttered svarita; confer, compare P.I.3. 12, 72. The mute vowel आ signifies the prevention of इडागम before the past part, affixes; confer, compare P. VII. 2. 16. Similarly, the mute vowel इ signfies the augment न् after the last vowel of the root; confer, compareP.VII.1.58; ई signifies the prevention of the augment इ before the past participle.affixes cfP.VII.2.14;उ signifies the inclusion of cognate letters; confer, compareP.I.1.69, and the optional addition of the augment इ before त्वा; confer, compare P.VII.2. 56; ऊ signifies the optional application of the augment इट्;confer, compareP.VII. 2.44; क signifies the prevention of ह्रस्व to the vowel of a root before the causal affix, confer, compareVII.4.2: लृ signifies the vikarana अङ् in the Aorist cf P.III.1.55; ए signifies the prevention of vrddhi in the Aorist,confer, compare P.VII.2.55; ओ signifies the substitution of न् for त् of the past participle. confer, compare P VIII.2.45; क् signifies the Prevention of गुण and वृद्धि, confer, compareP, I. 1.5; ख् signifies the addition of the augment मुम्(म्)and the shortening of the preceding vowel: confer, compareP.VI.3 65-66: ग् signifies the prevention of गुण and वृद्धि, confer, compare P.I.1.5 घ् signifies कुत्व, confer, compare P.VII.3.62; ङ्, applied to affixes, signifies the prevention of गुण and वृद्धि, confer, compare P.I.1.5; it causes संप्रसारणादेश in the case of certain roots, confer, compare P. VI.1.16 and signifies आत्मनेपद if applied to roots; confer, compare P.I. 3.12, and their substitution for the last letter if applied to substitutes. confer, compare P I.1.53. च् signifies the acute accent of the last vowel;confer, compareP.VI.1. 159; ञ् signifies उभयपद i.e the placing of the affixes of both the podas after the root to which it has been affixed;confer, compareP.I.3.72, ट् in the case of an augment signifies its application to the word at the beginning: confer, compareP I.1.64, while applied to a nominal base or an affix shows the addition of the feminine. affix ई (ङीप्) confer, compareP.IV.1. 15;ड् signifies the elision of the last syllable; confer, compare P.VI.4.142: ण् signifies वृद्धि, confer, compareP.VII.2.115;त् signifies स्वरित accent, confer, compare VI.1.181, as also that variety of the vowel ( ह्रस्व, दीर्ध or प्लुत) to which it has been applied confer, compare P.I.1.70; न् signifies आद्युदात्त, confer, compare P.VI.1.193:प् signifies अनुदात्त accent confer, compare अनुदात्तौ सुप्पितौ P. III.1.4. as also उदात्त for the vowel before the affix marked with प् confer, compare P.VI.1.192: म् signifies in the case of an augment its addition after the final vowel.confer, compareP.I.1.47,while in the case of a root, the shortening of its vowel before the causal affix णि,confer, compare P.VI.4.92: र् signifies the acute accent for the penultimate vowel confer, compare P.VI.1.217,ल् signifies the acute accent for the vowel preceding the affix marked with ल्; confer, compareP.VI. 193; श् implies in the case of an affix its सार्वधातुकत्व confer, compare P. II1.4.113, while in the case of substitutes, their substitution for the whole स्थानिन् cf P.I.1.55; प् signifies the addition of the feminine. affix ई ( ङीप् ) confer, compareP.IV-1.41 ;स् in the case of affixes signifies पदसंज्ञा to the base before them, cf P.I.4.16. Sometimes even without the actual addition of the mute letter, affixes are directed to be looked upon as possessed of that mute letter for the sake of a grammatical operation exempli gratia, for example सार्वधातुकमपित् P.I.2.4; असंयेागाल्लिट कित् P.I.2.5: गोतो णित् P.VII.1.90 et cetera, and others (2) thc short vowel इ as a substitute: confer, compare शास इदङ्हलोः P.VI.4.34.
itnukṛt affix mentioned by Pāṇini in VI.4.55 as causing the substitution of अय् for णि before it; e. g गदयित्नुः, स्तनयित्नुः M.Bh. on VI.4.55.
indraname of a great grammarian who is believed to have written an exhaustive treatise on grammar before Pāṇini; confer, compare the famous verse of Bopadeva at the commencement of his Dhātupāṭha इन्द्रश्चन्द्र: काशकृत्स्नापिशली शाकटायनः । पाणिन्यमरजैनेन्द्रा जयन्त्यष्टादिशाब्दिका: ॥ No work of Indra is available at present. He is nowhere quoted by Pāṇini. Many quotations believed to have been taken from his work are found scattered in grammar works, from which it appears that there was an ancient system prevalent in the eastern part of India at the time of Pāṇini which could be named ऐन्द्रव्याकरणपद्धति, to which Pāṇini possibly refers by the word प्राचाम्. From references,it appears that the grammar was of the type of प्रक्रिया, discussing various topics of grammar such as alphabet, coalescence, declension, context, compounds, derivatives from nouns and roots, conjugation, and changes in the base. The treatment was later on followed by Śākaṭāyana and writers of the Kātantra school.For details see Mahābhāṣya edition by D. E. Society, Poona, Vol. VII pages 124-127.
iyācase-ending for inst. singular. in Vedic Literature; e. g. उर्विया, दार्विया; confer, compare P.VII.1.39. and Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini).1 there on.
iṣṭhavadbhāvapossession of the same properties for causing grammatical operations as the taddhita affix. affix इष्ठन् possesses, as for instance, the elision of the syllable beginning with the last vowel ( टिलोप ), substitution of the masculine gender. base for the feminine. base (पुंवद्भाव) et cetera, and others, before the denom affix णिच्; exempli gratia, for example एतयति in the sense of एनीं आचष्टे; similarly प्रथयति, पटयति, दवयति, confer, compare M.Bh. on. P.VI.4. 155 Vārt, 1.
uṭaugment उ affixed to the roots वृ and तॄ before the kṛt affix तृ; confer, compare तृरुतृतरूतृवरुतृ वरूतृवस्त्रीरिति तरतेर्वृङ्वृञोश्च तृचि उट् ऊट् इत्येतावाग निपात्येते Kāś. on P. VII.2.34.उण् the affix उण्, causing वृद्धि on account of the mute letter ण , prescribed after the roots कृ, वा, पा, जि, मि, स्वद्, साध् and अशू by the rule कृवापाजिमित्वदिसाध्यशूभ्य उण् which is the first rule (or Sūtra) of a series of rules prescribing various affixes which are called Uṇādi affixes, the affix उण् being the first of them. exempli gratia, for example कारुः, वायु , स्वादु, साधु et cetera, and others; confer, compare Uṇādi I,1.
uṇādiprātipadikaword form or crude base, ending with an affix of the uṇ class, which is looked upon as practically underived, the affixes un and others not being looked upon as standard affixes applied with regular meanings attached to them and capable of causing operations to the preceding base as prescribed by rules of grammar; confer, compare उणादयोS व्युत्पन्नानि प्रातिपदिकानि । व्युत्पन्नानीति शाकटायनरीत्या । पाणिनेस्त्वव्युत्पत्तिपक्ष एवेति शब्देन्दुशेखरे निरूपितम्. Pari. Śek. on Paribhāṣa 22.
upalakṣaṇaimplication, indication: a thing indicatory of another thing. The term is very frequently found in commentary works in connection with a word which signifies something beyond it which is similar to it; the indication is generally inclusive; confer, compare Kāśikā on भीस्म्योर्हेतुभये P.I.3.68 भयग्रहणमुपलक्षणार्थं विस्मयोपि तत एव । as also मन्त्रग्रहणं तु च्छन्दस उपलक्षणार्थम् Kāś. on II.4.80. The verbal forms of लक्ष् and उपलक्ष् as also the words लक्षयितुम्, लक्षणीय, लक्षित et cetera, and others possess the sense of 'expressing the meaning not primarily, but secondarily by indication or implication'.
upasargapreposition, prefix. The word उसपर्ग originally meant only 'a prefixed word': confer, compare सोपसर्गेषु नामसु Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XVI. 38. The word became technically applied by ancient Sanskrit Gratmmarians to the words प्र, परा, अप, सम् et cetera, and others which are always used along with a verb or a verbal derivative or a noun showing a verbal activity; confer, compare उपसर्गाः क्रियायोगे P. I. 4.59. 'These prefixes are necessariiy compounded with the following word unless the latter is a verbal form; confer, compare कुगतिप्रादयः P.II. 2.18. Although they are not compounded with a verbal form, these prepositions are used in juxtaposition with it; sometimes they are found detached from the verbal form even with the intervention of one word or more. The prefixes are instrumental in changing the meaning of the root. Some scholars like Śākaṭāyana hold the view that separated from the roots, prefixes do not express any specific sense as ordinary words express, while scholars like Gārgya hold the view that prefixes do express a sense e. g. प्र means beginning or प्रारम्भ; confer, compare न निर्बद्धा उपसर्गा अर्थान्निराहुरिति शाकटायनः । नामाख्यातयोस्तु कर्मोपसंयोगद्योतका भवन्ति । उच्चावचाः पदार्था भवन्तीति गार्ग्यः । तद्य एषु पदार्थः प्राहुरिमं तं नामाख्यातयोरर्थविकरणम् Nirukta of Yāska.I. 8. It is doubtful, however, which view Pāṇini himself held. In his Ātmanepada topic, he has mentioned some specific roots as possessing some specific senses when preceded by some specific prefixes (see P. I. 3.20, 24, 25, 40, 4l, 46, 52, 56, et cetera, and others), which implies possibly that roots themselves possess various senses, while prefixes are simply instrumental in indicating or showing them. On the other hand, in the topic of the Karmapravacanīyas,the same words प्र, परा et cetera, and others which, however, are not termed Upasargas for the time being, although they are called Nipātas, are actually assigned some specific senses by Pāṇini. The Vārttikakāra has defined उपसर्ग as क्रियाविशेषक उपसर्गः P. I. 3.I. Vārt 7, leaving it doubtful whether the उपसर्ग or prefix possesses an independent sense which modifies the sense of the root, or without possessing any independent sense, it shows only the modified sense of the root which also is possessed by the root. Bhartṛhari, Kaiyaṭa and their followers including Nāgeśa have emphatically given the view that not only prefixes but Nipātas, which include प्र, परा and others as Upasargas as well as Karmapravacanīyas, do not denote any sense, but they indicate it; they are in fact द्योतक and not वाचक. For details see Nirukta of Yāska.I. 3, Vākyapadīya II. 190, Mahābhāṣya on I. 3.1. Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 7 and Kaiyaṭa's Mahābhāṣyapradīpa.and Mahābhāṣya-Pradīpoddyota by Nāgeśa.thereon. The Ṛk Prātiśākhya has discussed the question in XII. 6-9 where, as explained by the commentator, it is stated that prefixes express a sense along with roots or nouns to which they are attachedition It is not clear whether they convey the sense by denotation or indication, the words वाचक in stanza 6 and विशेषकृत् in stanza 8 being in favour of the former and the latter views respectively; cf उपसर्गा विंशतिरर्थवाचकाः सहेतराभ्यामितरे निपाताः; क्रियावाचकभाख्यातमुपसर्गो विशेषकृत्, सत्त्वाभिधायकं नाम निपातः पादपूरणः Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XII. st. 6 and 8. For the list of upasargas see Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XII. 6, Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.I. 15, Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.VI.24, and S. K. on P. I.4.60.
eka(1)Singular number, ekavacana: confer, compare नो नौ मे मदर्थं त्रिह्येकेषु. V. Pr.II.3: the term is found used in this sense of singular number in the Jainendra, Śākaṭāyana and Haima grammars ( 2 ) single ( vowel ) substitute (एकादेश) for two (vowels); cf एकः पूर्वपरयोः P.VI. 1.84; अथैकमुभे T.Pr. X.1; ( 3 ) many, a certain number : (used in plural in this sense), confer, compare इह चेत्येके मन्यते, Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P.I. 4.21 .
ekapadāmade up of a single word; confer, compare भवति चैतदकस्मिन्नपि एकवर्ण पदम् एकपदा ऋक् एकर्चं सूक्तमिति । Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P.I. 1.21 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 5; (2) made up of one foot ( चरण or पाद ); confer, compare एक एकपदैतेषां (R.Pr.XVII.24) explained by the commentator as तेषां चतुर्णां पादानामष्टाक्षरादीनां एकः पादः यस्याः सा एकपदा ऋक् इत्युच्यते ।
ekavacanasingular number; affix of the singular numberin Pāṇini's grammar applied to noun-bases ( प्रातिपदिक) and roots when the sense of the singular number is to be conveyed; the singular sense can be of the form of an individual or collection or genus. The word एकवचन in the technical sense of singular number is found used in the Prātiśākhyas and Nirukta also.
ekavattvaor एकवद्भाव use or treatment of the plural sense as if it is singular; confer, compare एकवद्भावोsनर्थक: 1 समाहारैकत्वात् M.Bh. on II. 4.12. Vart. 5.
ekavarṇa( a pada)made up of a single letter; confer, compare एकवर्णं पदम् आ, उ इति: commentary on R.Pr. X.2; confer, compare also V.Pr.IV. 144-145 where एकवर्ण is defined as एकप्रयत्ननिर्वर्त्य capable of being produced with a single effort. Pāṇini gives the term अपृक्त to an affix made up of one single letter; confer, compareअपृक्त एकाल् प्रत्यय: P.I.2.41.
ekavākyaan expression giving one idea, either a single or a composite one. A positive statement and its negation, so also, a general rule and its exception are looked upon as making a single sentence on account of their mutual expectancy even though they be sometimes detached from each other confer, compare विदेशस्थमपि सदेकवाक्यं भवति Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on III.4.67; confer, compare also निषेधवाक्यानामपि निषेध्यविशेषाकाङ्क्षत्वाद्विध्येकवाक्यतयैव अन्वयः । तत्रैकवाक्यता पर्युदासन्यायेन । संज्ञाशास्त्रस्य तु कार्यकालपक्षे न पृथग्वाक्यार्थबोधः । Par. Śek on Pari. 3. Such sentences are, in fact, two sentences, but, to avoid the fault of गौरव, caused by वाक्यभेद, grammarians hold them to be composite single sentences.
ekavṛttisingle vṛtti or gloss on the Vedic as well as classical portions of grammar. Puruṣottamadeva's Paribhāṣāvṛtti.adeva has used this term in his Bhāṣāvṛtti to contrast his Vṛtti (भाषावृत्ति) with the Kāśikāvṛtti and the Bhāgavṛtti which deal with both the portions; confer, compareअनार्ष इत्येकवृत्तावुपयुक्तम् Bhāṣāvṛtti on I.1.16, confer, comparealso Bhāṣāvṛtti on III. 4.99, IV.3.22 and VI.3.20.एकवृत्ति is possibly used by Puruṣottamadeva's Paribhāṣāvṛtti.adeva in the sense of मुख्यवृत्ति or साधारणवृत्ति i. e. the common chief gloss on both the portions.
ekaśeṣaa kind of composite formation in which only one of the two or more words compounded together subsists, the others being elided; confer, compare एकः शिष्यते इतरे निवर्तन्ते वृक्षश्च वृक्षश्च वृक्षौ । Kāśikā on सरूपाणामेकशेष एक-विभक्तौ P.I.2.64; confer, compare also सुरूपसमुदायाद्धि विभक्तिर्या विधीयते । एकस्तत्रार्थवान् सिद्धः समुदायस्य वाचकः ।। Bhāṣāvṛtti on P. I. 2.64. There is a dictum of grammarians that every individual object requires a separate expression to convey its presence. Hence, when there is a dual sense, the word has to be repeated, as also the word has to be multiplied when there is a plural sense. In current spoken language, however, in such cases the word is used only once. To justify this single utterance for conveying the sense of plurality, Pāṇini has laid down a general rule सरूपाणामेकशेष एकविभक्तौ and many other similar rules to cover cases of plurality not of one and the same object, but plurality cased by many objects, such as plurality caused by ideas going in pairs or relations such as parents, brothers and sisters, grand-father and grand-son, male and female. For example, see the words वृक्षश्च वृक्षश्च वृक्षौ; Similarly वृक्षाः for many trees, पितरौ for माता च पिता च; देवौ for देवी च देवश्च; confer, compare also the words श्वशुरौ, भ्रातरौ, गार्ग्यौ (for गार्ग्य and गार्ग्यायण),आवाम् (for त्वं च अहं च), यौ (for स च यश्च) and गावः feminine. अजा feminine. अश्वाः masculine gender. irrespective of the individuals being some males and some females. Pāṇini has devoted 10 Sūtras to this topic of Ekaśeṣa. The Daiva grammar has completely ignored this topic. Patanjali has very critically and exhaustively discussed this topic. Some critics hold that the topic of एकशेघ did not exist in the original Pāṇini's Aṣṭādhyāyī. of Pāṇini but it was interpolated later on, and adduce the long discussion in the Mahābhāṣya especially the Pūrvapakṣa therein, in support of their argument. Whatever the case be, the Vārttikakāra has commented upon it at length; hence, the addition must have been made immediately after Pāṇini, if at all there was any. For details see Mahābhāṣya on I.1.64 to 73 as also,Introduction p. 166-167, Vol.7 of the Mahābhāṣya published by the D. E. Society, Poona.
ekahalādihaving a single consonant at the beginning; cf एकहलादौ पूरयितव्येSन्यतरस्याम् P.VI.3.59.
ekahalmadhya(a vowel)placed between two single consonants; e.g the vowel अ in पच्, रम्, रण्, et cetera, and others
ekākṣaraconsisting of one single syllable ; exempli gratia, for example स्व, भू, वाच् et cetera, and others confer, compare एकाक्षरात्कृते जातेः सप्तम्यां च न तौ स्मृतौ M.Bh. on P.V.2.115, as also on VI.1.168, VI.4.161.
ekācpossessed of a single vowel, monosyllabic; confer, compare एकाचो द्वे प्रथमस्य P. VI.1.1.
ekādeśaa single substitute in the place of two original units; exempli gratia, for example ए in the place of अ and इ,or ओ in the place of अ and उ. The ādeśas or substitutes named पूर्वरूप and पररूप are looked upon as ekadeśas in Pāṇini's grammar although instead of them, the omission of the latter and former vowels respectively, is prescribed in some Prātiśākhya works. गुण and वृद्धि are sometimes single substitutes for single originals, while they are sometimes ekadeśas for two original vowels exempli gratia, for example तवेदम्, ब्रह्मौदनः, उपैति, प्रार्च्छति, गाम्, सीमन्तः et cetera, and others; see P.VI.1.87 to ll l, confer, compare also A.Pr.II 3.6.
ekādeśasvaraan accent prescribed for the single substitute,as, for instance, by rules like उदात्तस्वरितयोर्यणः स्वरितोनुदात्तस्य and the following rules P. VI.2.4, 5 and 6.
ekāntaraseparated or intervened by one single thing, a letter or a word; e. g. अां पचसि देवदत्त, where देवदत्त follows अाम् with one word पचसि intervening; confer, compare आम एकान्तरमामन्त्रितमनन्तिके P.VIII.1.55.
ekālpossessed of one single phonetic element or letter confer, compare अपृक्त एकाल् प्रत्ययः P. I.2.41.
aikapadyatreatment as one single word especially found in the case of compound words (सामासिकपद) which, as a result of such treatment, have only one accent (acute) and one case affix after the whole word; confer, compare अयं खल्वपि बहुव्रीहिरस्त्येव प्राथमकल्पिकः । यस्मिन्नैकपद्यमैकस्व र्यमेकविभक्तित्वं च Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ).on P.I.1.29. See एकपद.
aikārthyapossession of a single composite sense (by all words together in a compound); cf संंघातस्य ऐकार्थ्यात् सुबभावो वर्णात् M.Bh. on I. 2.45 Vārt 10; confer, compare also Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on II.2.29 Vārt, 7; confer, compare also नाम नाम्नैकार्थ्ये समासो बहुलम् Hemacandra's Śabdānuśāsana. III.1.18 where the commentator explains ऐकार्थ्य as एकार्थीभावः In the commentary on Hemacandra's Śabdānuśāsana. III 2.8 ऐकार्थ्य is explained as ऐकपद्य
kātantraprakriyāa name given to the Kātantra Sūtras which were written in the original form as a Prakriyāgrantha or a work discussing the various topics such as alphabet, euphonic rules, declension, derivatives from nouns, syntax, conjugation derivatives from roots et cetera, and others et cetera, and others
kārakakaumudīa work on the Kātantra grammar discussing the Kāraka portion.
kārakanirṇayaa work discussing the various Kārakas from the Naiyāyika view-point written by the well-known Naiyāyika, Gadādhara Chakravartin of Bengal, who was a pupil of Jagadīśa and who fourished in the 16th century A. D. He is looked upon as one of the greatest scholars of Nyāyaśāstra. His main literarywork was in the field of Nyāyaśāstra on which he has written several treatises.
kārakavāda(1)a treatise discussing the several Kārakas, written by Kṛṣṇaśāstri Ārade a famous Naiyāyika of Benares who lived in the eighteenth century A. D; (2) a treatise on syntax written by Jayarāmabhaṭṭācārya which is called कारकविवेक also, which see below. a treatise on syntax written by Jayarāmabhaṭṭācārya which is called कारकविवेक also, which see below.
kārakavibhakticase affix governed by a verb or verbal derivative as contrasted with उपपदविभक्ति a case affix governed by a noun, not possessing any verbal activity. See the word कारक a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page., See also the word उपपदविभक्ति.
ki(1)kṛt affix इ prescribed after धु roots with a prefix attached;exempli gratia, for exampleप्रदिः प्रधिः confer, compare P.III.3.92, 93; (2) kṛt affix इ looked upon as a perfect termination and, hence, causing reduplication and accusative case of the noun connected, found in Vedic Literature added to roots ending in अा, the root ऋ, and the roots गम्, हन् and जन्; exempli gratia, for example पपि; सोमं, जगुरिः, जग्मिः et cetera, and others, confer, compare P. III.2.171: (2) a term used in the Jainendra Vyākaraṇa for the term संबुद्वि.
kriyāvacanameaning or expressing a verbal activity; a term generally applied to dhātus or roots, or even to verbs. The term is also applied to denominative affixes like क्यच् which produce a sort of verbal activity in the noun to which they are added; confer, compare क्रियावचनाः क्यजादय: M.Bh. on III.1.19.
kriyāviśeṣaṇadeterminant or modifier of a verbal activity; confer, compare क्रियाविशेषणं चेति वक्तव्यम् । सुष्टु पचति दुष्टु पचति M.Bh. on II.1.1; nouns used as Kriyāviśeṣaṇa are put in the neuter gender, and in the nominative case. or the acc. case in the singular. number; confer, compare क्रियाविशेषणानां कर्मत्वं नपुंसकलिङ्गता च Pari.Bhāśkara Pari.56.
kṣveḍanahissing or whizzing sound given as a fault in the utterance of sibilants; confer, compare क्ष्चेडनमधिको वर्णस्य सरूपो ध्वनि: । commentary on Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XIV. 6.
gargādigaṇaa class of words headed by गर्ग to which the affix यञ्, ( य ) causing Vṛddhi to the first vowel of the word, is added in the sense of a descendant barring the son or daughter; confer, compare गर्गादिभ्यो यञ् P. IV. 1.105 and the instances गार्ग्यः, वात्स्यः, वैयाघ्रपद्यः, पौलस्यः confer, compare Kāś. on P. IV. 1. 105.
gavāśvaprabhṛtithe dvandva compound words गवाश्व, गवाविक गवैडक, अजाविक, कुब्जमाणवक, पुत्रपौत्र मांसशोणित and others which are to be declined in the neuter gender and singular number; confer, compare P. II. 4.11.
guṇavacanaliterally expressing quality; words expressing quality such as शुक्ल, नील, et cetera, and others; confer, compare गुणवचनब्राह्मणादिभ्यः कर्मणि च P.V. 1.124. See page 369 Vyākarana Mahabhasya Vol. VII. D.E. Society edition, Poona.
gauṇa(l)a word subordinate in syntax or sense to another; adjectival; उपसर्जनीभूतः (2) possessing a secondary sense, e. g the word गो in the sense of 'a dull man';confer, compareगौणमुख्ययेार्मुख्ये कार्यसम्प्रत्ययः, Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I.1.15, I.4. 108, VI. 3. 46. See also Par. Sek Pari. 15; (3) secondary, as opposed to primary; confer, compare गौणे कर्मणि दुह्यादे; प्रधाने नीहृकृष्वहाम् ।.
grahādia class of roots headed by the root ग्रह् to which the affix इन् (णिनि), causing vrddhi to the preceding vowel of the root, is added in the sense of an agent: exempli gratia, for example ग्राही, उत्साही, स्थायी, मन्त्री et cetera, and others; cf Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P.III. 1.134.
gha(l)consonant घ्, अ being added at the end for facility of pronunciation; confer, compareTai. Pr.I.21; (2) technical term for the taddhita affix. affixes तरप् and तमप्, confer, compare P.I.1.22, causing the shortening of ई at the end of bases before it, under certain conditions, confer, compare P. VI. 3.43-45, and liable to be changed into तराम् and तमाम् after किम्, verbs ending in ए, and indeclinables; confer, compare P.V.4.11; (3) taddhita affix. affix घ ( इय) in the sense of 'a descendant' applied to क्षत्र, and in the sense of 'having that as a deity' applied to अपोनप्तृ अपांनप्तृ and also to महेन्द्र and to the words राष्ट्र et cetera, and others, exempli gratia, for example क्षत्रियः, अपोनाप्त्रिय:, अपांनप्त्रियः, महेन्द्रियम्,राष्ट्रियः et cetera, and others; confer, compare P. IV.1.138, IV.2.27, 29, 93; (4) taddhita affix. affix घ, applied to अग्र, समुद्र and अभ्र in the sense of 'present there', to सहस्र in the sense of 'possession', to, नक्षत्र without any change of sense, and to यज्ञ and ऋत्विज् in the sense of 'deserving'; confer, compare P.IV.4.117,118,135, 136,141, V.1.71 ; (5) krt affix अ when the word to which it has been applied becomes a proper noun id est, that isa noun in a specific sense or a technical term; confer, compare III.3. 118, 119,125.
ghañkrt affix अ causing the substitution of vrddhi for the preceding vowel applied in various senses as specified in P.III.3. 16-42, III.3. 45-55,III.3.120-125, exempli gratia, for example पाद:, रोग:, आयः, भावः, अवग्राहृः प्रावारः, अवतारः, लेखः रागः etc
ghantaddhita affix. affix अ applied to the words शुक्र, तुग्र, पात्र, and to multisyllabic words in specified senses, causing the acute accent on the first vowel of the word so formed; confer, compareIV.2.26, IV.4. 115, V.1.68, V.3.79, 80.
ghinuṇkrt affix इन् causing the substitution of Vrddhi for the preceding vowel, as also to the penultimate vowel अ, applied to the eight roots शम्,तम्, दम् et cetera, and others, as also to संपृच्, अनुरुध् et cetera, and others and कस्, लष् लप्, et cetera, and others. e. g. शमी,तमी, दमी, संपर्की, संज्वारी, प्रलापी et cetera, and others; confer, compare P. III.2.141-145.
ṅasending of the genitive case singular; स्य is substituted for ङस् after bases ending in अ; cf P. IV. l . 2 and VII. 1. 12.
caṇthe indeclinable च (with ण् as a mute letter added to it which of course disappears) possessing the sense of चेत् or condition. exempli gratia, for example अयं च मरिष्यति confer, compare Kas, on P. VIII. 1.30.
carkarītaa term used by the ancient grammarians in connection with a secondary root in the sense of frequency; the term यङ्लुगन्त is used by comparatively modern grammarians in the same sense. The चर्करीत roots are treated as roots of the adadi class or second conjugation and hence the general Vikarana अ ( शप् ) is omitted after them.The word is based on the 3rd person. sing form चर्करीति from .the root कृ in the sense of frequency; exempli gratia, for example चर्करीति, चर्कर्ति, बोभवीति बोभोति; confer, compare चर्करीतं च a gana-sutra in the gana named ’adadi’ given by Panini in connection with अदिप्रभृतिभ्य; शपः Pāṇini. II.4.72; confer, compare also चर्करीतमिति यङ्लुकः प्राचां संज्ञा Bhasa Vr. on P. II. 4.72, The word चेक्रीयित is similarly used for the frequentative when the sign of the frequentative viz. य ( यङ् ) is not elidedition See चेक्रीयित.
carcā(1)splitting up of a word into its component parts, which is generalty shown in the Padaptha by अवग्रहं (S). The word, hence means पदपाठ or recital by showing separately the constitutent words of the Samhita or the running text of the Veda. The word is used almost in the same sense in the Mahabhasya in respect of showing the words of a sutra separately; confer, compare न केवलानि चर्चापदानि व्याख्यानं वृद्धिः आत् ऐजिति । किं तर्हि । उदाहरणं प्रत्युदाहरणं वाक्याध्याहारः इत्येतत्समुदितं व्याख्यानं भवति M.Bh. on Mahesvara Sutra 1 Wart. 6l ; (2) a repeated word; confer, compare इतिकरणात् पुरतो यत् पुनः पदवचनं तत् चर्चाशब्देनोच्यते. Uvvata on Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.III.20; (3) a discussion or a debate where consideration is given to each single word; confer, compare प्रर्यायशब्दानां लाघवगौरवचर्चा नाद्रियते Par. Sek. Pari. 115.
ciṇsubstitute इ causing vrddhi, in the place of the aorist vikarana affix च्लि, prescribed in the case of all roots in the passive voice and in the case of the roots पद्, दीप्, जन् et cetera, and others in the active voice before the affix त of the third person. singular. in the Atmanepada, which in its turn is elided by P. VI. 4. 104. cf P. III. 1.60-66.
cūrṇia gloss on the Sutras of Panini referred to by Itsing and Sripatidatta, Some scholars believe that Patanjali's Mahabhasya is referred to here by the word चूर्णि, as it fully discusses all the knotty points. Others believe that चूर्णि,stands for the Vrtti of चुल्लिभाट्टि. In Jain Religious Literature there are some brief comments on the Sutras which are called चूर्णि and there possibly was a similar चूर्णि on the sutras of Panini.
cphañtaddhita affix. affix अायन causing a vrddhi substitute for the first vowel of the word to which it is added, The affix ( च्फञ् ) is added in the sense of 'a descendant except the direct son or daughter’ to words कुञ्ज and others; confer, compare P. IV. I. 98.
cvyarthapossessing the sense of च्वि. See च्वि confer, compare P. III. 2. 56 also P. III. 3. 127 Vart. 1.
chaṇtaddhita affix. affix ईय causing the vrddhi substitute for the first vowel of the word to which it is addedition छण् is added (1) to the words पितृत्वसृ and मातृप्वसृ in the sense of अपत्य; confer, compare P IV. 1.132, 134; (2) to the words कृशाश्व,अरिष्ट and others as a चातुरर्थिक affix: confer, compare P. IV. 2.80; (3) to the words तित्तिरि, वरतन्तु, खण्डिक and उख in the sense of 'instructed by', confer, compare P.IV.3.102; and (4) to the word शलातुर in the sense of 'being a national of' or 'having as a domicile.' e. g. शालातुरीयःconfer, compare P. IV. 3.94.
jayādityaone of the famous joint authors ( जयादित्य and वामन ) of the well-known gloss ( वृत्ति ) on the Sutras of Panini, popularly called काशिकावृत्ति. As the काशिकावृत्ति is mentioned by It-sing, who has also mentioned Bhartrhari's Vakyapadiya, as a grammer treatise Written some 40 years before his visit, the time of काशिकावृत्ति is fixed as the middle of the 7th century A.D. Some scholars believe that जयादित्य was the same as जयापीड a king of Kasmira and बामन was his minister. For details, see pp. 386388 of the Vyakarana Mahabhasya Vol. VII published by the D.E. Society, Poona. See काशिका.
jñāpakaliterallyindirect or implicit revealer; a word very commonly used in the sense of an indicatory statement. The Sutras, especially those of Pinini, are very laconic and it is believed that not a single word in the Sutras is devoid of purpose. If it is claimed that a particular word is without any purpose, the object of it being achieved in some other way, the commentators always try to assign some purpose or the other for the use of the word in the Sutra. Such a word or words or sometimes even the whole Sutra is called ज्ञापक or indicator of a particular thing. The Paribhasas or rules of interpretation are mostly derived by indication(ज्ञापकसिद्ध) from a word or words in a Sutra which apparently appear to be व्यर्थ or without purpose, and which are shown as सार्थक after the particular indication ( ज्ञापन ) is drawn from them. The ज्ञापक is shown to be constituted of four parts, वैयर्थ्य, ज्ञापन, स्वस्मिञ्चारितार्थ्य and अन्यत्रफल. For the instances of Jñāpakas, see Paribhāșenduśekhara. Purușottamadeva in his Jñāpakasamuccaya has drawn numerous conclusions of the type of ज्ञापन from the wording of Pāņini Sūtras. The word ज्ञापक and ज्ञापन are used many times as synonyms although ज्ञापन sometimes refers to the conclusions drawn from a wording which is ज्ञापक or indicator. For instances of ज्ञापक, confer, compareM.Bh. on Māheśvara Sūtras 1, 3, 5, P. Ι.1. 3, 11, 18, 23, 51 et cetera, and others The word ऊठ् in the rule वाह ऊठ् is a well known ज्ञापक of the अन्तरङ्गपरिभाषा. The earliest use of the word ज्ञापक in the sense given a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page., is found in the Paribhāșāsūcana of Vyādi. The Paribhāșā works on other systems of grammar such as the Kātantra; the Jainendra and others have drawn similar Jñāpakas from the wording of the Sūtras in their systemanuscript. Sometimes a Jñāpaka is not regularly constituted of the four parts given a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.;it is a mere indicator and is called बोधक instead of ज्ञापक्र.
ñit(1)an afix marked with the mute letter ञ्; causing the substitution of vrddhi for the preceding vowel and acute accent for the first vowel of the word to which it is added, but, causing vrddhi for the first vowel of the word to which it is added in case the affix is a taddhita affix. affix: confer, compare P.VII.2, 115, 116, 117; (2) a root marked with the consonant ञ् , taking verb-endings of both the Parasmaipada and the Atmanepada kinds; exempli gratia, for example करोति, कुरुते, बिभर्ति, बिभृते, क्रीणाति, क्रीणीते elc.; confer, compare स्वरितञितः कत्राभिप्राये, क्रियाफले P.I.3.72.
ñyaṭtaddhita affix. affix य .causing वृद्धि to the first vowel of the word to which it is added and the addition of ई ( ङीप् ) in the sense of feminine gender, added to words meaning warrior tribes of the Vahika country but not Brahmanas or Ksatriyas. exempli gratia, for example क्षौद्रक्यः, क्षौद्रक्री et cetera, and others; cf P. V. 3. 114.
ṭakkrt affix अ, not admitting गुण or वृद्धि to the preceding vowel and causing ङीप् in the feminine ( by P.IV. 1.15), added to the roots गा, पा and हन् under certain conditions; e. g. समग;, सुरापः, पतिघ्नी et cetera, and others; confer, compare P. IV. 2.8, 52, 53, 54, 55.
ṭācase ending of the third case (तृतीया) singular. number; confer, compare P. IV.1.2,
ṭyaṇtaddhita affix. affix य, causing वृद्धि for the initial vowel and the addition of the feminine. affix ई, applied to the word सोम in the sense of 'having that as a deity,' e. g. सौम्यं हविः, सौमी ऋक्: confer, compare P.IV. 2.30.
ṭlañtaddhita affix. affix ल, causing vrddhi for the initial vowel of the word to which it is added and also the addition of the feminine.affix ई,applied to the word शमी in the sense of 'विकार,' e. g. शामीली स्रुक्; confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. IV. 3.142.
ṭhaka very common taddhita affix. affix इक, or क in case it is added to words ending in इस् , उस् , उ, ऋ, ल् and त् according to P. VII. 3. 51, causing the substitution of vrddhi for the first vowel of the word to which it is addedition ठक् is added to (1) रेवती and other words in the sense of descendant ( अपत्य ) e. g. रैवतिकः:, दाण्डग्राहिकः, गार्गिकः, भागवित्तिकः यामुन्दायनिकः, confer, compare P. IV. 1.146-149; (2) to the words लाक्षा,रोचना et cetera, and others in the sense of 'dyed in', e. g. लाक्षिकम्, रौचनिकम् ; confer, compare P. IV. 2.2; (3) to the words दधि and उदश्वित् in the sense of संस्कृत 'made better ', e. g. दाधिकम् , औदश्वित्कम् ( क instead of इक substituted for टक् ), confer, compare P. IV.2. 18, 19; (4) to the words अाग्रहायुणी, अश्वत्थ et cetera, and others; confer, compare P. IV. 2. 22, 23; (5) to words expressive of inanimate objects, to the words हस्ति and धेनु, as also to the words केश and अश्व in the sense of 'multitude '; confer, compare P. IV. 2. 47, 48; (6) to the words क्रतु, उक्थ and words ending in सूत्र, वसन्त et cetera, and others, in the sense of 'students of' ( तदधीते तद्वेद ), confer, compare P. IV. 2.59, 60, 63; (7) to the words कुमुद and others as also to शर्करा as a चातुरर्थिक affix; confer, compare P. IV. 2.80, 84; (8) to the words कन्था, भवत् and वर्षा in the Saisika senses; confer, compare P. IV. 2.102, 115, IV. 3.18; (9) to the words उपजानु and others in the sense 'generally present '; confer, compare P. IV. 3. 40; (10) to the words consisting of two syllables, and the words ऋक्, ब्राह्मण et cetera, and othersin the sense of 'explanatory literary work'; confer, compare P. IV.3.72: ( 11) to words meaning 'sources of income ' in the sense of 'accruing from’; confer, compare P. IV. 3.75; (12) to words denoting inanimate things excepting words showing time or place in the sense of ' भक्ति ', cf P. IV. 8.96; and (13) to the words हल् and सीर in the sense of 'belonging to', confer, compare P. IV. 3.124. The taddhita affix. affix ठक् is added as a general termination, excepting in such cases where other affixes are prescribed, in specified senses like 'तेन दीव्यति, ' 'तेन खनति,' 'तेन संस्कृतम्' et cetera, and others; cf P. IV. 4.1-75, as also to words हल, सीर, कथा, विकथा, वितण्डा et cetera, and others in specified senses, confer, compare P. IV.4. 81, 102 ठक् is also added as a general taddhita affix. affix or अधिकारविहितप्रत्यय, in various specified senses, as prescribed by P. V.1.19-63,and to the words उदर, अयःशूल,दण्ड, अजिन, अङ्गुली, मण्डल, et cetera, and others and to the word एकशाला, in the prescribed senses; confer, compare P. V. 2.67,76, V. 3.108,109; while, without making any change in sense it is added to अनुगादिन् , विनय, समय, उपाय ( औपयिक being the word formed), अकस्मात्, कथंचित्; (confer, compareआकस्मिक काथंचित्क), समूह,विशेष, अत्यय and others, and to the word वाक् in the sense of 'expressed'; confer, compare P. V. 4.13, 34, 35. The feminine. affix ङीप् ( ई ) is added to words ending in the affix टक् to form feminine. bases.
ṭhañtaddhita affix. affix इक or क (by P.VII.3.51) causing Vrddhi and acute accent for the first vowel of the word to which it is added, applied (1) to महृाराज, प्रोष्ठपद and क्वाचिन् in the specifieditionsenses, confer, compare P. IV.2.35, 4l e. g. माहृाराजिक, प्रौष्ठपदिक et cetera, and others; (2) to words काशि, चेदि, संज्ञा and others, along with ञिठ, e. g. काशिकी, काशिका, also with ञिठ to words denoting villages in the Vahika country exempli gratia, for example शाकलिकी शाकलिका; as also to words ending in उ forming names of countries in all the Saisika senses confer, compare P. IV.2.116-120; (3) to compound words having a word showing direction as their first member, to words denoting time, as also to the words शरद्, निशा and प्रदोष in the Saisika senses; cf P. IV.3.6, 7, 1115; (4) to the words वर्षा (1n Vedic Literature), and to हेमन्त and वसन्त in the Saisika senses; confer, compare P.IV.3.1921; (5) to संवत्सर, अाग्रहायणी, words having अन्तः as the first member, to the word ग्राम preceded by परि or अनु, to multisyllabic words having their last vowel accented acute, to words denoting sacrifices, to words forming names of sages, to words ending in ऋ and to the word महाराज in the specific senses which are mentioned; confer, compare P. IV.3.50, 60, 61, 67, 68, 69, 78, 79, 97; (6) to the words गोपुच्छ, श्वगण, आक्रन्द, लवण, परश्वध, compound words having a multisyllabic words as their first member, and to the words गुड et cetera, and others in the specified senses;confer, compareP.IV.4.6,II, 38, 52, 58, 64, 103;(7) to any word as a general taddhita affix. affix (अधिकारविहित), unless any other affix has been specified in the specified senses ' तेन क्रीतम् ' ' तस्य निमित्तम्' ... ' तदर्हम्' mentioned in the section of sutras V. 1. 18. to 117; (8) to the words अय:शूल, दण्ड, अजिन, compound words having एक or गो as their first member as also to the words निष्कशत and निष्कसहस्र; confer, compare P.V.2.76, 118,119.
ṭhantaddhita affix. affix इक or क (according to P. VII.3.51), causing the addition of आ, and not ई,..for forming the feminine base, applied (1) to the word नौ and words with two syllables in the sense of 'crossing' or 'swimming' over; confer, compare P.IV.4. 7; exempli gratia, for example नाविकः नाविका, बाहुकः बाहुक्रा; (2) to the words वस्र, क्रय, and विक्रय and optionally with छ to अायुघ in the sense of maintaining (तेन जीवति) ; confer, compare P. IV. 4.13, 14; (3) to the word प्रतिपथ, words ending with अगार, to the word शत, to words showing completion ( पूरणवाचिन् ), to the words अर्ध, भाग, वस्त्र, द्रव्य, षण्मास and. श्राद्ध in specified senses; confer, compare P. IV 4.42, 70, V. 1.21, 48, 49, 51, 84, V. 2, 85, and 109; (4) to words ending in अ as also to the words headed by व्रीहि, and optionally with the affix इल्च् to तुन्द and with the affix व to केशin the sense of मतुप्(possession); cf P.V. 2. 115, 116, 117 and 109.
ṭhitmarked with the mute letter ठ्. There is no affix or word marked with mute ठ् (at the end) in Panini's grammar, but to avoid certain technical difficulties, the Mahabhasyakara has proposed mute ठ् instead of 'ट् in the' case of the affix इट् of the first person. singular. perf Atm. and ऊठ् prescribed as Samprasarana substitute by P. VI. 4.132 e: g. प्रष्ठौहः, प्रष्ठौहा; confer, compare M.Bh. on III.4.79 and VI.4.19.
ḍaṇtaddhita affix. affix अ, causing vrddhi and टिलोप, applied to त्रिंशत् and चत्वारिंंशत् to show the परिमाण id est, that is measurement or extent of a Brahmana work; exempli gratia, for example त्रैंशानि ब्राह्मणानि, चात्वरिंशानि confer, compare P. V. I.62
ḍāverb-ending आ, causing elision of the penultimate vowel as also of the following consonant, substituted for the 3rd person. sing, affix तिप् of the first future; exempli gratia, for example क्रर्ता ; confer, compare P.II.4.85; (2) case ending आ substituted in Vedic Literature for any case affix as noticed in Vedic usages; exempli gratia, for example नाभा पृथिव्याम्: confer, compare P. VII.1.39
ḍiyāccase affix इया for Inst.singular.seen in Vedic Literature: exempli gratia, for example सुक्षेत्रिया, सुगात्रिया; cf Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P.VII.1.39.
ḍhaktaddhita affix. affix एय causing the substitution of vrddhi for the first vowel of the word to which it is addedition ढक् is added in the sense of अपत्य (descendant) (I) to words ending in feminine affixes, to words ending in the vowel इ, excepting इ of the taddhita affix. afix इञ्, to words of the class headed by शुभ्र, to words मण्डूक, विकर्ण, कुषीतक, भ्रू , .कुलटा and to words headed by कल्याणी which get इन substituted for its !ast vowel; exempli gratia, for example सौपर्णेयः, दात्तेयः शौभ्रेय, माण्डूकेयः, , वैकर्णेयः, कौषीतकेयः, भ्रौवेयः,.कौलटेयः, काल्याणिनेयः etc: cf Kas on P. IV.I. 1 19-127; (2) to the words पितृष्वसृ and मातृष्वसृ with the vowel ऋ elided and to the word . दुष्कुल, पितृष्वसेय:, मातृष्वसेयः, दौष्कुलेयः, confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. IV. 1.133, 134, 142: (3) to the word कलि in the sense of Sama, to the word अग्नि in the sense of 'dedicated to a deity' ( सास्य देवता ) as also to the words नदी, मही, वाराणसी, श्रावस्ती and others in the Saisika senses; e. g. कालेयं साम, आग्नेयः, नादेयम् महियम् et cetera, and others cf Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. IV. 2.8, 33, 97: (4) to the words तूदी, धुर् , कपि, ज्ञाति, व्रीहि and शालि in the specified senses; confer, compare P. IV. 3.94, IV. 4.77, V. 1.127, V. 2.2.
ḍhañtaddhita affix. affix एय causing Vrddhi substituted for the first vowel of the base and the addition of the feminine. affix ङीप् (इ), applied (1) to words meaning quadrupeds and words in the class of words headed by गृष्टि in the sense of अपत्य; e. g. कामण्डलेयः, गार्ष्टेयः, हालेय:, बालेयः etc; confer, compare P. IV.1.135,136; (2) to the word क्षीर, words of the class headed by सखि, the words कोश, दृति, कुक्षि, कलशि, अस्ति, अहि,ग्रीवा,वर्मती,एणी,पथि,अतिथि,वसति,स्वपति, पुरुष, छदि्स, उपधि, बलि, परिखा, and वस्ति in the various senses mentioned in connection with these words; exempli gratia, for exampleक्षेरेयः, .साखेयम् कौशेयम् दात्र्ऱेयम् , कौक्षेयम् etc, cf Kas'. on P. IV. 2. 20, 80, IV. 3. 42, 56, 57, 94, 159, IV.4.1 04, V.1.10,13,17, V.3.101.
ṇamulkrt affix अम्, causing vrddhi to the final vowel or to the penultimate अ, (!) added to any root in the sense of the infinitive in Vedic Literature when the connected root is शक्: exempli gratia, for example अग्निं वै देवा विभाजं नाशक्नुवन; cf Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. III. 4.14; (2) added to any root to show frequency of a past action, when the root form ending with णमुल् is repeated to convey the sense of frequency : exempli gratia, for example भोजं भोजं व्रजति, पायंपायं व्रजति, confer, compare Kas on P. III. 4.22; (3) added to a root showing past action and preceded by the word अग्रे, प्रथम or पूर्व, optionally along with the krt affix क्त्वा; exempli gratia, for example अग्रेभोजं or अग्रे भुक्त्वा व्रजति; cf Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P.III.4.24;(4) added in general to a root specified in P.III.4.25 to 64, showing a subordinate action and having the same subject as the root showing the main action, provided the root to which णमुल् is added is preceded by an antecedent or connected word, such as स्वादुम् or अन्यथा or एवम् or any other given in Panini's rules; confer, compare P. III.4.26 to III.4.64; exempli gratia, for example स्वादुंकारं भुङ्क्ते, अन्यथाकारं भुङ्क्ते, एवंकारं भुङ्क्ते, ब्राह्मणवेदं भोजयति, यावज्जीवमधीते, समूलकाषं कषति, समूलघातं हन्ति, तैलपेषं पिनष्टि, अजकनाशं नष्टः et cetera, and others; cf Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P.III.4.26-64. When णमुल् is added to the roots कष्, पिष्, हन् and others mentioned in P. III. 4. 34 to 45, the same root is repeated to show the principal action. The word ending in णमुल् has the acute accent (उदात) on the first vowel (confer, compare P.VI.I. 94) or on the vowel preceding the affix; confer, compare P. VI.1.193.
ṇiṅaffix इ causing vrddhi, prescribed after the root कम् , the base ending in इ i. e. कामि being called a root: confer, compare P. III. 1.30, 32. The mute letter ङ् signifies that the root कामि is to take only the Atmanepada affixes e. g. कामयते, अचीकमत.
ṇicaffix इ causing Vrddhi (1) applied to roots of the tenth conjugation ( चुरादिगण ) such as चुर् , चित् et cetera, and others e. g. चोरयति, चोरयते; confer, compare P. III. 1.25: (2) applied to any root to form a causal base from it, e. g. भावयति from भू, गमयति from गम्: confer, compare हेतुमति च P. III. 1.26: (3) applied to the words मुण्ड, मिश्र etc, in the sense of making, doing, practising et cetera, and others ( करण ); e. g. मुण्डं करोति मुण्डयति, व्रतयति (eats something or avoids it as an observance), हलं गृह्नाति हलयति et cetera, and others; cf P. III. 1.21; (4) applied to the words सत्य, पाश, रूप, वीणा, तूल, श्लोक, सेना, लोमन, त्वच्, वर्मन्, वर्ण and चूर्ण in the various senses given by the Varttikakara to form denominative roots ending in इ: e. g. सत्यापयति, पाशयति etc; confer, compare P. III.1.25: (5) applied to suitable words in the sense of composing, exempli gratia, for example सूत्रं करोति सूत्रयति, et cetera, and others: (6)applied to a verbal noun ( कृदन्त ) in the sense of 'narrating' with the omission of the krt affix and the karaka of the verbal activity put in a suitable case; e. g. कंसं घातयति for the sentence कंसवधमाचष्टे or बलिं बन्धयति for बलिबन्धमाचष्टे,or रात्रिं विवासयति, सूर्यमुद्गमयति, पुष्येण योजयति et cetera, and others: confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. III. 1.26. Roots ending in णिच् (णिजन्त) take the conjugational endings of both the Parasmaipada and the, Atmanepada: confer, compare णिचश्च P. I. 3.74. They have perfect forms by the addition of अाम् with a suitable form of the perfect tense of the root कृ, भू or अस् placed after अाम्, the word ending with अाम् and the verbal form after it being looked upon as separate words e. g. कारयां चकार कारयां चक्रे et cetera, and others; cf P. III.1.35, 40. They have the aorist form, with the substitution of the Vikarana चङ् ( अ ) for च्लि before which the root is reduplicated; e. g. अचीकरत्, अबीभवत् et cetera, and others: confer, compare P.III.1.48, VI.1.11 as also VII.4.93-97.
ṇinikrt affix इन् signifying vrddhi (1) applied to the roots headed by ग्रह् ( i. e. the roots ग्रह्, उद्वस्, स्था et cetera, and others ) in the sense of an agent;e. g. ग्राही, उद्वासी, स्थायी. confer, compare P. III.1.134; (2) applied to the root हन् preceded by the word कुमार or शीर्ष as उपपद: e. g. कुमारघाती, शीर्षघाती, confer, compare P. III.2.51: (3) applied to any root preceded by a substantive as upapada in the sense of habit, or when compari son or vow or frequency of action is conveyed, or to the root मन्, with a substantive as उपपद e. gउष्णभोजी, शीतभोजी, उष्ट्रकोशी, ध्वाङ्क्षरावीः स्थण्डिलशायी, अश्राद्धभोजीः क्षीरपायिण उशीनराः; सौवीरपायिणो वाह्रीकाः: दर्शनीयमानी, शोभनीयमानी, confer, compare P. III.2.78-82; (4) applied to the root यज् preceded by a word referring to the करण of यागफल as also to the root हन् preceded by a word forming the object ( कर्मन् ) of the root हन् , the words so formed referring to the past tense: e. g. अग्निष्टो याजी, पितृव्याघाती, confer, compare P. III 2.85, 86; (5) applied to a root when the word so formed refers to a kind of necessary activity or to a debtor; confer, compare अवश्यंकारी, शतंदायी, सहस्रदायी confer, compare P. III.4. 169-170: (6) tad-affix इन् , causing vrddhi for the first vowel, applied to the words काश्यप and कौशिक referring to ancient sages named so, as also to words which are the names of the pupils of कलापि or of वैशम्पायन, as also to the words शुनक, वाजसनेय et cetera, and others in the sense of 'students learning what has been traditionally spoken by those sages' e. g. काश्यपिनः, ताण्डिनः, हरिद्रविणः शौनकिनः, वाजसनेयिनः et cetera, and others; cf P. IV.3, 103 104, 106; (7) applied to words forming the names of ancient sages who are the speakers of ancient Brahmana works in the sense of 'pupils studying those works' as also to words forming the names of sages who composed old Kalpa works in the sense of those कल्प works; e. g. भाल्लविनः, एतरेयिणः । पैङ्गी कल्पः अरुणपराजी कल्पः; cf Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. IV. 3.105: (8) applied to the words पाराशर्य and शिलालिन् in the sense of 'students reading the Bhiksusutras (of पाराशार्य) and the Nata sutras ( of शिलालिन् ) respectively; e. g. पाराशरिणो भिक्षव:, शैलालिनो नटाः: cf Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. IV.3.110.
ṇyuṭkrt affix अन in the sense of ' skilled agent ' applied (1) to the root गै to singular. exempli gratia, for example गायनः, गायनी, confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. III 1.147, also गाथकः, गाथिका by P. III. 1.146: (2) to the root हा (III. P. and III.A. also) if ' rice ' or ' time ' be the sense conveyed: e. g. हायना व्रीहयः, हायनः संवत्सरः .confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. III. 1.148.
ṇvikrt, affix ण्वि i. e. zero, causing vrddhi, applied to the root भज् and to सह् and वह् in Vedic Literature if the root is preceded by any preposition ( उपसर्ग ) or a substantive as the upapada ; e. g. अर्द्धभाक्, प्रभाक्, तुराषाट् , दित्यवाट्; confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. III, 2.62, 63, 64.
ṇvul(1)a very general krt affix अक, causing vrddhi and acute accent to the vowel preceding the affix, applied to a root optionally with तृ (i. e. तृच् ) in the sense of an agent e. g कारकः हारकः also कर्ता, हर्ता ; Cf P. III. 1.33; (2) krt. affix अक applied optionally with the affix तुम् to a root when it refers to an action for which another action is mentioned by the principal verb; e. g. भोजको व्रजति or भोक्तुं व्रजति; confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on तुमुन्ण्वुलौ क्रियायां क्रियार्थायाम्; P. III. 3.10; (3) krt affix अक, necessarily accompanied by the feminine. affix अा added to it, applied to a root if the sense given by the word so formed is the name of a disease or a proper noun or a narration or a query ; e. g. प्रवाहिका, प्रच्छर्दिका, शालभञ्जिका, तालभञ्जिका, कारिक, confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. III. 3.108, 109, 110.
t(1)personal ending of the third pers singular. Atm: confer, compare P. III. 4.78, which is changed to ते in the perfect tense and omitted after the substitute चिण् for च्लि in the aorist; confer, compare P.VI.4.04: (2) personal ending substituted for the affix थ of the Paras. 2nd person. plural in the imperative, imperfect, potential, benedictive, aorist and conditional for which, तात्, तन and थन are substituted in Vedic Literature, and also for हि in case a repetition of an action is meant; confer, compare P. III. 4. 85, 10l as also VII. 1. 44, 45 and III. 4. 2-5. cf P. III. 4. 85 and III. 4. 10I ; (3) taddhita affix. affix त applied to the words कम् and शम् e. g. कन्तः, शन्त:, confer, compare P. V. 2. 138: (4) taddhita affix. affix त applied to दशत् when दशत् is changed to श; confer, compare दशानां दशतां शभावः तश्च प्रत्ययः । दश दाशतः परिमाणमस्य संधस्य शतम्, Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. V. l. 59; (5) .general term for the affix क्त of the past passive voice. part, in popular use: (6) a technical term for the past participle affixes (त) क्त and तवत् ( क्तवतु ) called निष्ठा by Panini; confer, compare P. I.1.26; the term त is used for निष्ठI in the Jainendra Vyakararna.
tadādividhia convention similar to the तदन्तविधि of Panini,laid down by the Varttikakara laying down that in case an operation is prescribed for something followed by a single letter, that single letter should be taken to mean a word beginning with that single letter: confer, compare यस्मिन्विधिस्तदादावल्ग्रहणे P.I.1.72 Vart. 29: Par. Sek. Pari. 33.
tamaptaddhita affix. affix तम added without a change of sense, i. e. in the sense of the base itself to noun bases possessing the sense of excellence, as also to verbal forms showing excellence: e. g. आढ्यतमः, दर्शनीयतमः, श्रेष्ठतमः, पचतितमाम् confer, compare Kas on P. V. 3.55-56. The affix तमप् is termed घ also; confer, compare P. I. 1.22.
tāt(1)the same as तातङ् substituted for तु and हि of the imperative second. and third singular. Parasmaipada; confer, compare P.VII.1.35; (2) substitute तात् for त of the imperative 2nd plural in Vedic Literature; exempli gratia, for example गात्रं गात्रमस्यानूनं कृणुतात् confer, compare Kas on P.VII.1.44.
ti(1)personal ending तिप् of the 3rd person. singular.; (2) common term for the krt affixes क्तिन् and क्तिच् as also for the unadi affix ति; see क्तिन् and क्तिच्; (3) feminine. affix ति added to the word युवन्. e. g. युवतिः confer, compare P. IV. 1.77; (4) taddhita affix. affix ति as found in the words पङ्क्ति and विंशति confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P.V.1.59; (5) taddhita affix. affix added to the word पक्ष in the sense of 'a root,' and to the words कम् and शम् in the sense of possession (मत्वर्थे ); exempli gratia, for example पक्षतिः, कन्तिः, शान्तिः, confer, compare Kas, on P. V.2.25, 138; (6) a technical term for the term गति in Panini's grammar, confer, compare उपसर्गाः क्रियायोगे; गतिश्च P. 1.4.59, 60. The term ति for गति is used in the Jainendra Vyakarana.
tikādia class of words headed by the words तिक, केितव, संज्ञा and others to which the taddhita affix अायनि (फिञ्) causing the substitution of vrddhi is added in the sense of 'a descendant'; exempli gratia, for example तैकायनि:, कैतवायनि:; confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. IV.1.154.
tipthe personal ending of the 3rd person. singular. substituted for ल (लकार) in the Parasmaipada. For substitutes for तिप् in special cases, see P. VI.1.68, III.4.82, 83, 84.
tu(1)short term ( प्रत्याहार ) for the dental consonants त्, थ्, द्, ध् and न् confer, compare P. I. 1.69; (2) personal-ending substituted for ति in the 2nd person. imper. singular. Parasmaipada confer, compare P. III, 4.86; (3) taddhita affix. affix तु in the sense of possession added in Vedic Literature to कम् and शम् e. g. क्रन्तुः, शन्तु: confer, compare P. V. 2.138; (4) unadi affix तु ( तुन्) prescribed by the rule सितनिगमिमसिसच्यविधाञ्कुशिभ्यस्तुन् ( Unadi Sitra I.69 ) before which the augment इ is not added exempli gratia, for example सेतुः सक्तुः et cetera, and others confer, compare P. VII. 2.9
taudādikaa root belonging to the तुदादि class of roots ( sixth conjugation ) which take the vikarana अ ( श ) causing no guna or vrddhi substitute for the vowel of the root.
th(1)personal-ending of the 2nd person. plural Parasmaipada,substituted for the ल् of the ten lakara affixes; (2) substitute ( थल् ) for the 2nd pers singular. personal ending सिप् in. the perfect tense: (3) unadi affix ( थक् ) added to the roots पा, तॄ, तुद् et cetera, and others e. g. पीथः, तीर्थः, et cetera, and others; cf unadi sutra II. 7; (4) unadi affix ( क्थन् ) | added to the roots हन्, कुष् ,नी et cetera, and others; e. g, हथः, कुष्टं, नीथः et cetera, and others cf unadi sutra II. 2: (5) unadi affix (थन्) added to the roots उष्, कुष्, गा and ऋ, e. g. ओष्ठः, कोष्ठम् et cetera, and others cf unadi sutra_II. 4; (6) a technical term for the term अभ्यस्त or the reduplicated wording of Panini ( confer, compare उभे अभ्यस्तम् ) P. VI. 1. 5, used in the Jainendra Vyakarana.
thakankrt affix थक added to the root गै 'to sing,' in the sense of agent provided he is skilled: e. g. गाथकः ; confer, compare P. III. 1.146.
thalpersonal ending थ substituted for सिप् of the 2nd person.singular. Parasmaipada in the perfect tense as also in the present tense in specific cases; confer, compare P. III. 4.82, 88,84.
thāspersonal ending of the 2nd person. singular. Atmanepada, substituted for ल् of the lakara affixes.
dthird consonant of the dental class of consonants possessed of the properties नादानुप्रदान, घोष, संवृतकण्ठत्व and अल्पप्राणता;(2) consonant द् substituted for the final letter of nouns ending with the affix वस् as also for the final letter of स्रंस्, ध्वंस् and अनडुह् provided the final letter is at the end of a pada; exempli gratia, for example विद्वद्भयाम् et cetera, and others; cf Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P, VIII. 2.72; (3) consonant द् substituted for the final स् of roots excepting the root.अस्, before the personal ending तिप् of the third person. singular.; e. g. अचकाद् भवान् ; confer, compare P. VIII. 3.93.
dadhipayaādia class of compound words headed by the word दधिपयस् which are not compounded as समाहारद्वन्द्व which ends in the neuter gender and singular number; exempli gratia, for example दधिपयसी, शिववैश्रवणौ, श्रद्धातपसी et cetera, and others; confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P.II. 4.14.
dyotakaindicative, suggestive; not directly capable of expressing the sense by denotation; the nipatas and upasargas are said to be 'dyotaka' and not 'vacaka' by standard grammarians headed by the Varttikakara; confer, compare निपातस्यानर्थकस्यापि प्रातिपदिकत्वम् P.I.2.45 Varttika 12; confer, compare Kaiyata also on the a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.; cf also निपाता द्योतकाः केचित्पृथगर्थाभिधायिनः Vakyapadiya II.194;, गतिवाचकत्वमपि तस्य ( स्थाधातोः ) व्यवस्थाप्यते, उपसर्गस्तु तद्योतक एव commentary on Vakyapadiya II. 190; confer, compare पश्चाच्छ्रोतुर्बोधाय द्योतकोपसर्गसंबन्ध: Par. Sek. on Pari. 50; cf also इह स्वरादयो वाचकाः चादयो द्योतका इति भेदः Bhasa Vr. om P.I.1.37.The Karmapravacaniyas are definitely laid down as dyotaka, confer, compare क्रियाया द्योतको नायं न संबन्धस्य वाचकः । नापि क्रियापदाक्षेपीं संबन्धस्य तु भेदकः Vakyapadiya II.206; the case affixes are said to be any way, 'vacaka' or 'dyotaka'; confer, compare वाचिका द्योतिका वा स्युर्द्वित्त्वादीनां विभक्तयः Vakyapadiya II. 165.
dviguname of a compound with a numeral as the first member. The compound is looked upon as a subdivision of the Tatpurusa comPoundThe dvigu compound, having collection as its general sense, is declined in the neuter gender and singular number; when it ends in अ the feminine. affix ङी is added generally, e. g. पञ्चपात्रम्, त्रिभुवनम्, पञ्चमूली. The Dvigu comPound also takes place when a karmadharaya compound, having a word denoting a direction or a numeral as its first member, (a) has a taddhita affix. affix added to it exempli gratia, for example पञ्चकपाळः (पुरोडाशः), or (b) has got a word placed after it in a compound e. g. पशञ्चगवधनः or (c) has a collective sense exempli gratia, for example पञ्चपूली; confer, compare तद्वितार्थोत्तरपदसमाहारे च ( P. II.1.51 ) also, cf Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. and S. K. om P.II.1.51,52.
ghātumañjarīcalled also धातुसंग्रहृ attributed to a grammarian namcd Kasinatha.
dhātuvṛttia general term applied to a treatise discussing roots, but specifically used in connection with the scholarly commentary written by Madhavacārya, the reputed scholar and politician at the court of the Vijayanagara kings in the fourteenth century, on the Dhatupatha ot Panini. The work is generally referred to as माधवीया-धातुवृति to distinguish it from ordinary commentary works called also धातुवृत्ति written by grammarians like Wijayananda and others.
dhāraṇa(1)suppression of a consonant, out of two successive consonants which is looked upon as a fault of recital; exempli gratia, for example ह्वयामि when recited as वयामि; efeminine. धारणमनुपलब्धिः Uvvata on R.Pr.XIV. 6; (2) repetition of a consonant which is also a fault; exempli gratia, for example ज्ज्योतिष्कृत् for ज्योतिष्कृत्: confer, compare Uvvata on XIV.6;confer, compare also धारयन्त; परक्रमं et cetera, and others explained by Uvvata as सान्तस्थस्य संयोगस्य आदौ रक्तं धारयन्तो विलम्बमानाः परक्रमं कुर्वन्ति where धारयन्तः means 'lengthening’ or 'prolonging' confer, compare R.Pr. on XIV.23; (3) the peculiar position of the mouth (मुखसंधारणम् ) by which a double consonant is recited as a single one, confer, compare द्विवर्णमेकवर्णवत् ( एकप्रयत्ननिर्वर्त्य ) धारणात् exempli gratia, for example व्यात्तम् , कुक्कुटः, confer, compare V.Pr. IV.144.
dhi(1)a technical term used for sonant consonants in the Pratisakhya and old grammar works; confer, compare धि शेषः V. Pr.I.53, explained by Uvvata as वर्गाणां उत्तरास्त्रय: यरलवहकाराश्च धिः V.Pr. I.53; the term धि corresponds to हश् of Panini; (2) personal ending धि substituted for हि of the imperative 2nd singular. exempli gratia, for example जुहुधि, छिन्द्धि, भिन्द्धि, श्रुधि, रारन्धि et cetera, and others; confer, compareP.V.4.101-103.
dhuṭ(1)the augment ध् prefixed to the consonant स् following upon the consonant ड् or न् occurring at the end of a word; exempli gratia, for example श्वलिट्त्साये, महान्त्साये et cetera, and others; confer, compare P. VIII.3.29; (2) technical short term for धातु (root); the technical term is धुष् , but the nominative case. singular. used is धुट्; (3) a technical term standing for cononants excepting semi-vowels and nasals; confer, compare धुटश्च धुटि Kat. III.6.51. The term is used in the Katantra Vyakarana. It corresponds to the term झर् of Panini.
nañtatpuruṣaa compound with न as its first member which is changed into अ or अन्, or remains unchanged, the indeclinable न (नञ् ) possessing any one of the six senses given a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page. under न (6); e. g अब्राह्मणः, अनश्वः, नमुचिः et cetera, and others; confer, compare P. VI. 3 73-77.
natiliterallyinclination, bending down; the word is used generally in the technical sense of 'cerebralization' but applied to the change of न् into ण् as also that of स् into ष्; confer, compare दन्त्यस्य मूर्धन्यापत्तिर्नतिः, V. Pr.I. 42. The root नम् is used in the sense of 'cerebralizing ' or 'being cerebralized' very frequently in the Pratisakhya works; exempli gratia, for example the word नम्यते is used in the sense of 'is cerebralized'; नमयति in the sense of 'cerebralizes' and नामिंन् in the sense of 'causing cerebralization'; confer, compare ऋकारादयो दश नामिन: स्वराः, पूर्वो नन्ता नतिषु नम्यमुत्तरम् Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) I. 27.
nadīa technical term applied in Panini's grammar to words in the feminine gender ending in ई and ऊ excepting a few like स्त्री,श्री, भ्रू and others; it is optionally applied to words ending in इ and उ, of course in the feminine. gender, before case affixes of the dative, ablative, genitive and locative singular. The term was probably in use before Panini and was taken from the feminine. word नदी which was taken as a model. Very probably there was a long list of words like नद् ( नदट्) चोर ( चोरट् ) et cetera, and others which were given as ending in ट् and to which the affix ई (ङीप्) was added for forming the feminine base;the first word नदी so formed, was taken as a model and all words in the list and similar others were called नदी; confer, compare P. I 4. 3-6.
(1)taddhita affix. affix ना as also नाञ् prescribed respectively after वि and नञ् (negative particle न ) in the sense of separation; e. g. विना, नाना ; (2) case ending ना substituted for the inst. instrumental case. singular. affix टा (called also अाङ् in ancient grammars) in the masculine gender after words called घि i. e. words ending in इ or उ excepting such as are called नदी.
nānāpadadifferent words as opposed to समानपद or a single word; confer, compare Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.III. 80; T.Pr. XXIV. 3, XX. 3.
nāsikāsthānaa place in the nose where a nasal letter such as ङ्, ञ्, ण्, न् or म् and anusvara get a tinge of nasalization while passing through it. The yama letters e.g the nasal क्, ख् ,ग् , घ् get nasalization in the utterance of the words पलिक्किनः, चख्ख्नतुः, अग्ग्निः, घ्घ्नन्ति; confer, compare यमो नाम वर्णः प्रातिशाख्ये प्रसिद्धः S.K. on P. VIII. 2. 1. confer, compare also यमानुस्वारनासिक्यानां नासिके Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.I. 74, Ṛktantra Prātiśākhya. 12.
ni(1)personal ending substituted for मि (मिप्) of the 1st person. singular. in the imperative; (2) a technical term in the Jainendra Vyakarana for the term निपात of Panini.
nipātaa particle which possesses no gender and number, and the case termination after which is dropped or elidedition Nipata is given as one of the four categories of words viz नामन्, आख्यात, उपसर्ग and निपात by all the ancient writers of Pratisakhya, Vyakarana and Nirukta works;confer, compare Nirukta of Yāska.I. 4, M.Bh. on I. 1. Ahnika l, Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XII. 8 et cetera, and others The word is derived from the root पत् with नि by Yaska who has mentioned three subdivisions of Niptas उपमार्थे, कर्मोपसंग्रहार्थे and पदपूरणे; confer, compare अथ निपाताः । उच्चावचेष्वर्थेषु निपतन्ति । अप्युपमार्थे । अपि कर्मोपसंग्रह्यार्थे । अपि पदपूरणाः । Nirukta of Yāska.I. 4. The Nipatas are looked upon as possessed of no sense; confer, compare निपातः पादपूरणः Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XII. 8, Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.VIII. 50, ( commentary by Uvvata ). Panini has not given any definition of the word निपात, but he has enumerated them as forming a class with च at their head in the rule चादयोऽसत्वे where the word असत्वे conveys an impression that they possess no sense, the sense being of two kinds सत्त्व and भाव, and the Nipatas not possesssing any one of the two. The impression is made rather firm by the statement of the Varttikakra'निपातस्यानर्थकस्य प्रातिपदिकत्वम्' P. I. 2. 45 Vart. 12. Thus, the question whether the Nipatas possess any sense by themselves or not, becomes a difficult one to be answeredition Although the Rkpratisakhya in XII.8 lays down that the Nipatas are expletive, still in the next verse it says that some of them do possess sense; confer, compare निपातानामर्थवशान्निपातनादनर्थकानामितरे च सार्थकाः on which Uvvata remarks केचन निपाताः सार्थकाः, केचन निरर्थकाः । The remark of Uvvata appears to be a sound one as based on actual observation, and the conflicting views have to be reconciledition This is done by Bhartrhari who lays down that Nipatas never directly convey the sense but they indicate the sense. Regarding the sense indicated by the Nipatas, it is said that the sense is never Sattva or Dravya or substance as remarked by Panini; it is a certain kind of relation and that too, is not directly expressed by them but it is indicatedition Bhoja in his Srngaraprakasa gives a very comprehensive definition of Nipata as:-जात्यादिप्रवृत्तिनिमित्तानुपग्राहित्वेनासत्त्वभूतार्थाभिधायिनः अलिङ्गसंख्याशक्तय उच्चावचेष्वर्थेषु निपतन्तीत्यव्ययविशेषा एव चादयो निपाताः । He gives six varieties of them, viz. विध्यर्थ, अर्थवादार्थ, अनुवादार्थ, निषेधार्थ, विधिनिषेधार्थ and अविधिनिषेधार्थ, and mentions more than a thousand of them. For details see Bhartrhari's Vakyapadiya II. 189-206.
niruktaname of a class of works which were composed to explain the collections of Vedic words by means of proposing derivations of those words from roots as would suit the sense. The Nirukta works are looked upon as supplementary to grammar works and there must have been a good many works of this kind in ancient times as shown by references to the writers of these viz. Upamanyu, Sakatayana,Sakapuni,Sakapurti and others, but, out of them only one work composed by Yaska has survived; the word, hence has been applied by scholars to the Nirukta of Yaska which is believed to have been written in the seventh or the eighth century B. C. i. e. a century or two before Panini. The Nirukta works were looked upon as subsidiary to the study of the Vedas along with works on phonetics ( शिक्षा ), rituals ( कल्प ), grammar (व्याकरण) prosody (छन्दस्) and astronomy(ज्योतिष)and a mention of them is found made in the Chandogyopanisad. As many of the derivations in the Nirukta appear to be forced and fanciful, it is doubtful whether the Nirukta works could be called scientific treatises. The work of Yaska, however, has got its own importance and place among works subsidiary to the Veda, being a very old work of that kind and quoted by later commentators. There were some glosses and commentary works written upon Yaska's Nirukta out of which the one by Durgacarya is a scholarly one.It is doubtful whether Durgacarya is the same as Durgasimha, who wrote a Vrtti or gloss on the Katantra Vyakarana. The word निरुक्त is found in the Pratisakhya works in the sense of 'explained' and not in the sense of derived; confer, compare Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XV 6; V.Pr. IV. 19, 195.
numaugment न् inserted after the last vowel (1) of a root given in the Dhātupātha as ending with mute इ; exempli gratia, for example निन्दति, क्रन्दति, चिन्तयति, जिन्वति et cetera, and others; confer, compare P VII.1.58; (2) of roots मुच् and others before the conjugational sign अ ( श ); e. g. मुञ्चति, लुम्पति; confer, compare P. VII.1.59; (3) of the roots मस्ज्, नश्, रध्, जभ् and लभ् under certain specified conditions, exempli gratia, for exampleमङ्क्त्वा, नंष्टा, रन्धयति, जम्भयति, लम्भयति, आलम्भ्यः et cetera, and others confer, compare P.VII. 1.60-69; (4) of declinable bases marked with the mute indicatory letter उ, ऋ or ऌ as also of the declinable wording अञ्च् from the root अञ्च् and युज्, exempli gratia, for exampleभवान्, श्रेयान् , प्राङ्, युङ्, confer, compare Kās. on P. VII.1. 70, 71; (5) of the declinable base in the neuter gender, ending with a vowel or with any consonant excepting a semivowel or a nasal, before a case-ending termed Sarvanāmasthāna; exempli gratia, for example यशांसि, वनानि, जतूनि et cetera, and others, confer, compare Kās. on VII.1.72; (6) of the declinable base in the neuter gender, ending with इ, उ,ऋ or ऌ before a case-ending beginning with a vowel; exempli gratia, for example मधुने, शुचिने et cetera, and others, confer, compare Kās, on P. VII.1.73; (7) of the affix शतृ ( अत् of the present tense. participle.) under certain conditions याती यान्ती; पचन्ती, सीव्यन्ती, confer, compare I .VII.78-8 : (8) of the word अनडुह् before the nominative case. and vocative case. singular. affix सु;exempli gratia, for example अनड्वान् , हे अनड्वन्, confer, compare P. VII.1. 82; (9) of the words दृक्, स्ववस् and स्वतवस् before the nominative case. and vocative case.singular.affix सु in Vedic Literature, e. g. यादृङ्, स्ववान् , स्वतवान् , confer, compare P.VII.1.83.
nemaspṛṣṭapartly touched, half touched; semi-contacted; a term used for sibilants and hissing sounds.
pakṣādia class of words headed by the word पक्ष to which the taddhita affix अायन ( फक् ) causing vŗddhi is added in the four senses given in P. IV. 2.67-70; e. g. पाक्षायण:, अाश्मायनः et cetera, and others; confer, compare Kāś. on P. IV. 2.80.
pacādia class of roots headed by the root पच् to which the kŗt. affix अ ( अच् ) is added in the sense of 'an agent'; e. g. श्वपचः, चोरः, देवः et cetera, and others The class पचादि is described as अाकृतिगण and it is usual with commentators to make a remark पचाद्यच् when a kŗt affix अ is seen after a root without causing the vŗddhi substitute to the preceding vowel or to the penultimate vowel अ. confer, compare अज्विधिः सर्वधातुभ्यः पठ्यन्ते च पचादय: । अण्बाधनार्थमेव स्यात् सिध्यन्ति श्वपचादघ: Kāś. on P. III. 1.134.
pañcapadīa term used in the AtharvaPrātiśākhya for the strong case affixes viz. the nominative case affixes and the accusative singular. and dual affixes; confer, compare चत्वारि क्षैप्रञ्च पञ्चपद्यामन्तोदात्तादीनि यात् Atharvaveda Prātiśākhya. I. 3.14. The term corresponds to the Sarvanāmasthāna of Pāņini, which is also termed सुट् ; confer, compare सुडनपुंसकस्य P. I. 1.43.
patañjalithe reputed author of the Mahābhāșya, known as the Pātañjala Mahābhāșya after him. His date is determined definitely as the second century B.C. on the strength of the internal evidence supplied by the text of the Mahābhāșya itselfeminine. The words Gonardiya and Gonikāputra which are found in the Mahābhāșya are believed to be referring to the author himself and, on their strength he is said to have been the son of Goņikā and a resident of the country called Gonarda in his days. On the strength of the internal evidence supplied by the Mahābhāșya, it can be said that Patañjali received his education at Takșaśila and that he was,just like Pāņini, very familiar with villages and towns in and near Vāhika and Gāndhāra countries. Nothing can definitely be said about his birthplace, and although it might be believed that his native place was Gonarda,its exact situation has not been defined so far. About his parentage too,no definite information is available. Tradition says that he was the foster-son of a childless woman named Gonikā to whom he was handed over by a sage of Gonarda, in whose hands he fell down from the sky in the evening at the time of the offering of water-handfuls to the Sun in the west; confer, compareपतत् + अञ्जलि, the derivation of the word given by the commentators. Apart from anecdotes and legendary information, it can be said with certainty that Patañjali was a thorough scholar of Sanskrit Grammar who had studied the available texts of the Vedic Literature and Grammar and availed himself of information gathered personally by visiting the various schools of Sanskrit Grammar and observing the methods of explanations given by teachers there. His Mahābhāșya supplies an invaluable fund of information on the ways in which the Grammar rules of Pāņini were explained in those days in the various grammar schools. This information is supplied by him in the Vārttikas which he has exhaustively given and explainedition He had a remarkable mastery over Sanskrit Language which was a spoken one at his time and it can be safely said that in respect of style, the Mahābhāșya excels all the other Bhāșyas in the different branches of learning out of which two, those of Śabaraswāmin and Śańkarācārya,are selected for comparison. It is believed by scholars that he was equally conversant with other śāstras, especially Yoga and Vaidyaka, on which he has written learned treatises. He is said to be the author of the Yogasūtras which,hence are called Pātañjala Yogasūtras, and the redactor of the Carakasamhitā. There are scholars who believe that he wrote the Mahābhāșya only, and not the other two. They base their argument mainly on the supposition that it is impossible for a scholar to have an equally unmatching mastery over three different śāstras at a time. The argument has no strength, especially in India where there are many instances of scholars possessing sound scholarship in different branches of learning. Apart from legends and statements of Cakradhara, Nāgesa and others, about his being the author of three works on three different śāstras, there is a direct reference to Patañjali's proficiency in Grammar, Yoga and Medicine in the work of King Bhoja of the eleventh century and an indirect one in the Vākyapadīya of Bhartŗhari of the seventh century A. D. There is a work on the life of Patañjali, written by a scholar of grammar of the South,named Ramabhadra which gives many stories and incidents of his life out of which it is difficult to find out the grains of true incidents from the legendary husk with which they are coveredition For details,see Patañjala Mahābhāșya D.E.Society's edition Vol. VII pages 349 to 374. See also the word महाभाष्य.
padavidhian operation prescribed in connection with words ending with case or verbal affixes and not in connection with noun-bases or root-bases or with single letters or syllables. पदविधि is in this way contrasted with अङ्गविधि ( including प्रातिपदिकविधि and धातुविधि ), वर्णविधि and अक्षरविधि, Such Padavidhis are given in Pāņini's grammar in Adhyāya2, Pādas l and 2 as also in VI.1.158, and in VIII. 1.16 to VIII.3.54 and include rules in connection with compounds, accents and euphonic combinations. When, however, an operation is prescribed for two or more padas, it is necessary that the two padas or words must be syntactically connectible; confer, compare समर्थः पदविधिः P. II.1.1.
padādi(1)beginning of a word, the first letter of a word; confer, compare सात्पदाद्योः P. VIII.3.111; confer, compare also स्वरितो वानुदात्ते पदादौ P. VIII.2.6. Patañjali, for the sake of argument has only once explained पदादि as पदादादिः confer, compare M.Bh.on I. 1. 63 Vāŗt. 6; (2) a class of words headed by the word पद् which is substituted for पद in all cases except the nominative case. and the acc. singular and dual; this class, called पदादि, contains the substitutes पद् , दत्, नस् et cetera, and others respectively for पाद दन्त, नासिका et cetera, and others confer, compare Kās on P. VI. 1.63; (3) the words in the class, called पदादि, constiting of the words पद्, दत्, नस्, मस् हृत् and निश् only, which have the case affix after them accented acute; confer, compare P. VI. 1.171.
paśyantīname of the second out of the four successive stages in the origination or utterance of a word from the mouth. According to the ancient writers on Phonetics, sound or word ( वाक् ) which is constituted of air ( वायु ) originates at the Mulaadhaaracakra where it is called परा. It then springs up and it is called पश्यन्ती in the second stage. Thence it comes up and is called मध्यमा in the third stage; rising up from the third stage when the air strikes against the vocal chords in the glottis and comes in contact with the different parts of the mouth, it becomes articulate and is heard in the form of different sounds. when it is called वैखरी; confer, compare वैखर्या मध्यमायाश्च पश्यन्त्याश्चैतदद्भुतम् । अनेकतीर्थभेदायास्त्रय्या वाचः परं पदम् Vaakyapadiya I. 144, and also confer, compare पश्यन्ती तु सा चलाचलप्रतिबद्धसमाधाना संनिविष्टज्ञेयाकारा प्रतिलीनाकारा निराकारा च परिच्छिन्नार्थप्रत्ययवभासा संसृष्टार्थप्रत्यवभासा च प्रशान्तसर्वार्थप्रत्यवभासा चेत्यपरिमितभेदा । पश्यन्त्या रूपमनपभ्रंशामसंकीर्ण लोकव्यवह्यरातीतम् । commentary on Vaakyapadiya I. 144. confer, compare also तत्र श्रोत्रविषया वैखरी । मध्यमा हृदयदशेस्था पदप्रत्यक्षानुपपत्त्या व्यवहारकारणम् । पश्यन्ती तु लोकव्यवहारातीता। योगिनां तु तत्रापि प्रकृतिप्रत्ययविभागावगतिरस्ति | परायां तु न इति त्रय्या इत्युक्तम् । Mahābhāṣya-Pradīpoddyota by Nāgeśa.on चत्वारि वाक्परिमिता पदानि । Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). Ahnika 1.
pāṇinisūtracalled also by the name अष्टक or पाणिनीय-अष्टक; name given to the SUtras of Paanini comprising eight adhyaayaas or books. The total number of SUtras as commented upon by the writers of the Kasika and the Siddhaantakaumudi is 3983. As nine sUtras out of these are described as Vaarttikas and two as Ganasutras by Patanjali, it is evident that there were 3972 SUtras in the Astaka of Paanini according to Patanjali. A verse current among Vaiyakarana schools states the number to be 3996; confer, compare त्रीणि सूत्रसहस्राणि तथा नव शतानि च । षण्णवतिश्च सूत्राणां पाणिनिः कृतवान् स्वयम् । The traditional recital by Veda Scholars who look upon the Astadhyayi as a Vedaanga, consists of 3983 Sutras which are accepted and commented upon by all later grammarians and commentators. The SUtras of Paanini, which mainly aim at the correct formation of words, discuss declension, conjugation, euphonic changes, verbal derivatives, noun derivatives and accents. For details see Vol.VII, Vyaakarana Mahaabhaasya, D. E. Society's edition pp. 152-162.
pitmarked with the mute letter प् which is indicative of a grave accent in the case of affixes marked with it, as for example, the affixes तिप् , सिप् and मिप् ; confer, compare अनुदात्तौ सुप्पितौ P. III. 1.4. A Sarvadhātuka affix, marked with the mute consonant प्, in Pāņiņi's Grammar has been described as instrumental in causing many operations such as (a) the substitution of guņa; (cf P. VII. 3 84,9l). (b) the prevention of guņa in the case of a reduplicative syllable as also in the case of the roots भू and सू ( confer, compare P. VII. 3.87, 88 ); (c) the substitution of Vŗddhi, (confer, compare P. VII. 3.89, 90 ), (d) the augments इ and ई in the case of the roots तृह् and ब्रू respectively ( confer, compare P. VII. 3.92, 93, 94 ), and (e) acute accent for the vowel preceding the affix in the case of the roots भी, हृी, भृ and others ( confer, compare P. VI. 1.192 ). A short vowel (of a root) gets त् added to it when followed by a kŗt affix marked with प्: exempli gratia, for example, विजित्य​, प्रकृत्य, et cetera, and others:(confer, compare P. VI. 1.71 ).
punaḥprasaṅgavijñānaoccurrence or possibility of the application of a preceding grammatical rule or operation a second time again, after once it has been set aside by a subsequent opposing rule or rules in conflict; confer, compare पुनःप्रसङ्गविज्ञानात् सिद्धम् Paribhāṣenduśekhara of Nāgeśa. Pari. 39; confer, compare Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. I. 4.2 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 7; confer, comparealso Puru. Pari. 40.
prakampadepression of the voice after raising it as noticed in connection with the utterance of the svarita vowels in certain cases and in certain Vedic schools with a view to show the svarita nature of the vowel distinctly, in spite of the fact that such a depression is generally looked upon as a.fault; confer, compare असन्दिग्धान् स्वरान् ब्रूयादविकृष्टानकाम्पितान् Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) III.18 as also जात्योभिानिहितश्चैव क्षैप्रः प्रश्लिष्ट एव च । एते स्वराः प्रकम्पन्ते यत्रोच्चस्वरितोदयाः Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) III. 19.
prakalpaka(fem. प्रकल्पिका )a word or expression causing a change in the nature of another word or expression which has to be taken as changed accordingly; confer, compare प्रकल्पक्रमिति चेन्नियमाभावः P.I. 1.68 Vart. 15; प्रत्ययविधिरयं न च प्रत्ययविधौ पञ्चम्यः प्रकल्पिक्रा भवन्ति M.Bh. on P.I.1.27 Vart.1,I.1. 62 Vart.7; II.2.3 Vart.1, IV. 1.60; cf also रुधादिभ्यः इत्येषा पञ्चमी शप् इति प्रथमायाः षष्ठीं प्रकल्पयिष्यति, Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on II 2.3, Vart. 1, III.1.33.
prakriyākaumudīsāraa commentary on Ramacandra's Prakriyakaumud by a grammarian named Kasinatha
pragāthaa couple of Vedic hymns divided into three hymns for purposes of singing as Saman; confer, compare यत्र द्वे ऋचौ प्रग्रथनेन तिस्रः क्रियन्ते स प्रगाथनात् प्रकर्षगानाद्वा प्रगाथ इत्युच्यते Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P.IV 2.55.
pragītaa fault of utterance or recital where a simple word in conversation or recital is uttered in a tone proper for singing or in a manner suitable for singing; cf प्रगीत: सामवदुच्चारितः Kaiy. on M.Bh.Ahni.1.
pratidvandvabhāveinopponent, opposing: अन्तरङ्गं बहिरङ्गमिति प्रतिद्वन्द्वाभाविंनौ एतौ पक्षौ। M.Bh. on P. VIII.3.15.
pratiṣedhakaa word expressing a prohibition, e. g. the negative particle न (नञ्); confer, compare नेति प्रतिषेधकः T. Pr.XXII.8.
pratyayagrahaṇaparibhāṣāthe guiding rule that when an affix ( प्रत्यय ) is given in a rule as a निमित्त (causing something), the affix denotes a word-form which begins with that to which that affix has been added and ends with the affix itself; confer, compare प्रत्ययग्रहणे यस्मात् स विहितस्तदादेस्तदन्तस्य च ग्रह्यणम् Par. Sek. Pari. 23. The rule यञियोश्च, which prescribes the affix फक् (आयन), has the word यञ् and इञ् which respectively mean यञन्त and इञन्त; in the word परमगार्ग्यायण from परमगार्ग्य the word गार्ग्य is looked upon as यञन्त to which फक् (अायन) is affixed and hence the word परमगार्ग्यायण is arrived at and not पारमगार्ग्य.
pratyayalakṣaṇaan operation caused by an affix which takes place even though the affix is elided: exempli gratia, for example the term षद is applied to अग्निचित्, सोमसुत् et cetera, and others on account of the words ending with a case affix although the affix of the nominative case. singular. has been elided; confer, compare प्रत्ययलोपे प्रत्ययलक्षणम्. P.I.1. 62 and Kas, thereon.
pratyāhāraliterally bringing together; bringing together of several letters ( or words in a few cases, such as roots or nouns ) by mentioning the first and the last only for the sake of brevity; the term प्रत्याहार is generally used in connection with brief terms such as अण्, अक् , अच् , हल् and the like, created by Panini in his grammar by taking any particular letter and associating it with any mute final letter ( अनुबन्ध ) of the fourteen Sivasutras, with a view to include all letters beginning with the letter uttered and ending with the letter which precedes the ( mute ) letter. The practice of using such abbreviations was in existence before Panini, possibly in the grammar attributed to Indra. The term प्रत्याहार is not actually used by Panini; it is found in the Rk. Tantra; confer, compare प्रत्याहारार्थो वर्णोनुबन्धो व्यञ्जनम् R.T.I.3. The term appears to have come into use after Panini. Panini has not given any definition of the term प्रत्याहार. He has simply given the method of forming the Pratyaharas and he has profusely used them; confer, compare आदिरन्त्येन सहेता P. I. 1.71. The word कृञ् in P. III.1.40 and तृन् in P. II. 3.69 are used as Pratyaharas. For a list of the Pratyharas which are used by Panini see Kasika on the Maheswara Sutras.
pradīpapopular name of the famous commentary on the Mahabhasya of Patanjali written by the reputed grammarian Kaiyata in the eleventh century A. D. The cornmentary is a very scholarly and critical one and really does justice to the well-known compliment given to it, viz. that the Pradipa has kept the Mahabhasya alive which otherwise would have remained unintelligible and consequently become lost. The commentary प्रदीप is based on the commentary महाभाष्यदीपिका,or प्रदीपिका written by Bhartrhari, which is available at present only in a fragmentary form. The Pradipa is to this day looked upon as the single commentary on the Mahabhasya in spite of the presence of a few other commentaries on it which are all thrown into the back-ground by it.
prayojakacausing another to do; causal agent; confer, compare कुर्वाणं प्रयुङ्क्ते इति प्रयोजकः Ks. on P. I. 4.55.
pravādinaḥscholars who explain the changes ( प्रवाद ) mentioned a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.; possibly the Padakaras or writers of the पदपाठ;cf प्रवादिनो दूणाशदूढ्यदूलभान् ... महाप्रदेशं स्वधितीव चानयेन्नुदच्च R Pr. XI. 20. Apparently प्रवादिनः ( nominative case. singular.) seems to be the word in the explanation of Uvvata.
praśśliṣṭa(l)an additional letter (vowel or consonant) read on splitting up a euphonic combination; confer, compare प्रश्लिष्टा. वर्णावेतौ M.Bh.on P.I.1.9 Vart. 2; (2) ; contracted combination; name of a Samdhi where two vowels coalesce into one single vowel, confer, compare R.Pr. । II. 15-19.
phañtaddhita affix. affix फ marked with ञ् causing the Vrddhi substitute for the initial vowel of the word, applied in the sense of grandchildren and their issues to words अश्व and others, as also to the word भर्ग; exempli gratia, for exampleआश्वायन, अाश्मायनः, भार्गायणः confer, compare अश्वादिभ्यः फञ् and भर्गात् त्रैगर्ते; confer, compare P.IV.1.110 and 111.
bhrūmadhyaliterallycentre of the brows, or eyebrows which is described as the place of air ( which produces utterance or speech) at the time of the evening soma-pressing or sacrifice: confer, compare प्रात:सवनमाध्यन्दिनसवनतृतीयसवनक्रमेण उर:कण्ठभ्रूमध्यानि त्रीणि स्थानानि वायोर्भर्वान्त Vāj. Prāt. I. 30; confer, compare also भ्रुवोर्मध्ये प्राणमावेश्य सम्यक्.
m(1)fifth letter of the labial class of consonants which is possessed of the properties नादानुप्रदान, घोष, कण्ठसंवृतत्व, अल्पप्राणत्व and अानुनासिक्य ; (2) substitute म् ( मश् ) for अम् of the 1st. person. singular. in Vedic literature; exempli gratia, for example वधीं वृत्रम्| confer, compare अमो मश् P. VII, 1.40;
maṇtaddhita affix. affix म, causing vṛddhi for the word मध्य, in the sense of 'present therein' ( तत्र भवः ); exempli gratia, for example माध्यम:; confer, compare मण्मीयौ चापि प्रत्ययौ, P.IV. 3.60 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 2.
manoramā(1)the popular name given to the commentary प्रौढमनेारमा on the Siddhāntakaumudī of भट्टोजीदीक्षित by the author himself the commentary is a scholarly one and very extensive; and its first portion only upto the end of Kāraka is generally read in the Sanskrit Pāṭhaśālās;(2) name of a commentary on the Madhyasiddhāntakaumudī by Rāmasarman; (3) name given to a treatise discussing roots given in the Kātantra Grammar written by रमानाथशर्मा in the sixteenth century. The work is called कातन्त्रधातुवृत्ति also.
mahābhāṣyaliterally the great commentary. The word is uniformly used by commentators and classical Sanskrit writers for the reputed commentary on Pāṇini's Sūtras and the Vārttikas thereon by Patañjali in the 2nd century B. C. The commentary is very scholarly yet very simple in style, and exhaustive although omitting a number of Pāṇini's rules. It is the first and oldest existing commentary on the Pāṇini's Aṣṭādhyāyī. of Pāṇini, and, in spite of some other commentaries and glosses and other compendia, written later on to explain the Sutras of Panini, it has remained supremely authoritative and furnishes the last and final word in all places of doubt: confer, compare the remarks इति भाष्ये स्थितम्, इत्युक्तं भाष्ये, इत्युक्तमाकरे et cetera, and others scattered here and there in several Vyaakarana treatises forming in fact, the patent words used by commentators when they finish any chain of arguments. Besides commenting on the Sutras of Paanini, Patanjali, the author, has raised many other grammatical issues and after discussing them fully and thoroughly, given his conclusions which have become the final dicta in those matters. The work, in short, has become an encyclopedic one and hence aptly called खनि or अकर. The work is spread over such a wide field of grammatical studies that not a single grammatical issue appears to have been left out. The author appears to have made a close study of the method and explanations of the SUtras of Paanini given at various academies all over the country and incorporated the gist of those studies given in the form of Varttikas at the various places, in his great work He has thoroughly scrutinized and commented upon the Vaarttikas many of which he has approved, some of which he has rejected, and a few of which he has supplementedition Besides the Vaarttikas which are referred to a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page., he has quoted stanzas which verily sum up the arguments in explanation of the difficult sUtras, composed by his predecessors. There is a good reason to believe that there were small glosses or commentaries on the SUtras of Paanini, written by learned teachers at the various academies, and the Vaarttikas formed in a way, a short pithy summary of those glosses or Vrttis. . The explanation of the word वृत्तौ साधु वार्तिकम् given by Kaiyata may be quoted in support of this point. Kaiyata has at one place even stated that the argument of the Bhaasyakaara is in consonance with that of Kuni, his predecessor. The work is divided into eighty five sections which are given the name of lesson or आह्लिक by the author, probably because they form the subject matter of one day's study each, if the student has already made a thorough study of the subject and is very sharp in intelligence. confer, compare अह्ला निर्वृत्तम् आह्लिकम्, (the explanation given by the commentatiors).Many commentary works were written on this magnum opus of Patanjali during the long period of twenty centuries upto this time under the names टीका, टिप्पणी, दीपिका, प्रकाशिका, व्याख्या, रत्नावली, स्पूर्ति, वृत्ति, प्रदीप, व्याख्यानं and the like, but only one of them the 'Pradipa' of कैयटीपाध्याय, is found complete. The learned commentary by Bhartrhari, written a few centuries before the Pradipa, is available only in a fragment and that too, in a manuscript form copied down from the original one from time to time by the scribes very carelessly. Two other commentaries which are comparatively modern, written by Naarayanasesa and Nilakantha are available but they are also incomplete and in a manuscript form. Possibly Kaiyatabhatta's Pradipa threw into the background the commentaries of his predecessors and no grammarian after Kaiyata dared write a commentary superior to Kaiyata's Pradipa or, if he began, he had to abandon his work in the middle. The commentary of Kaiyata is such a scholarly one and so written to the point that later commentators have almost identified the original Bhasya with the commentary Pradipa and many a time expressed the two words Bhasya and Kaiyata in the same breath as भाष्यकैयटयोः ( एतदुक्तम् or स्पष्टमेतत् ).
mahābhāṣyadīpikāa very learned old commentary on the Mahabhasya of Patanjali written by the reputed grammarian Bhartrhari or Hari in the seventh century A. D. The commentary has got only one manuscript preserved in Germany available at present, of which photostat copies or ordinary copies are found here and there. The first page of the manuscript is missing and it is incomplete also, the commentary not going beyond the first seven Aahnikas. For details see page 383 Vol. VII Vyaakarana Mahabhasya D. E. Society's edition.
mi( मिप् )pcrsonal ending of the first person ( उत्तमपुरुष ) singular; confer, compare तिप्तस्झ तरिझ । P.III.4.78.
mippersonal ending मि of the first person ( उत्तमपुरुष ) singular. Parasmaipada: confer, compare तिप्तस्झि...महिङ् P. III.4.78.
y(1)the consonant य् with अ added to it merely for the sake of facility in pronunciation; यकार is also used in the same sense: e. g. लिटि वयो यः: P.VI.1.38 confer, compare T.Pr.I: 17,21;(2) krt affix (यत्) prescribed as कृत्य or potential passive participle; exempli gratia, for exampleचेयम्, गेयम्, शाप्यम् , शक्यम् , गद्यम् , अजर्यम् पण्यम् et cetera, and others: confer, compare अचो यत्...अजर्यं संगतम् P.III. 1.97-105; (3) krt. affix क्यप् which is also an affix called krtya; e. gब्रह्मोद्यम् , भाव्यम्, घात्यम् , स्तुत्यम् , कल्प्यम् , खेयम् , भृत्यः:, भिद्यः, पुष्य:, कृत्यम्,also कार्यम् ; confer, compare P. III. 1.106-128:(4) krt affix ण्यत् ( which is also कृत्य ), e. g कार्यम् , हार्यम् , वाक्यम् , लाव्यम्, कुण्डपाय्यम्. et cetera, and others: cf P. III. 1.124-132: (5) taddhita affix. affix य affixed (a) in the sense of collection to पाश, वात et cetera, and others, as also to खल, गो and रथ, e. g. पाद्या, रथ्या et cetera, and others confer, compare P. IV. 2. 49, 50ः (b) in the चातुरर्थिक senses to बल, कुल, तुल et cetera, and others e. g. वल्यः,.कुल्यम् efeminine. P V.2. 80, (c) as a Saisika taddhita affix. affix to ग्राम्यहः' along with the affix खञ्ज e. g. ग्राम्यः, ग्रामीणः: cf P: IV. 2.94 (d) in the sense of 'good therein' ( तत्र साधुः ) and other stated senses affixed to सभा, सोदर पूर्व, and सोम: e. g. सभ्य:, पूर्व्यः; .et cetera, and others. confer, compare P. IV. 4.105, 109, 133, 137, 138: (e) in the sense of 'deserving it' to दण्ड and other words, e. g. दण्ड्य, अर्ध्र्य, मध्य, मेध्य, et cetera, and others: cf P. V. 1.66: ( f ) in the sense of quality or action to सखि e. g. सख्यम् ; cf P. V. 1.126: (6) taddhita affix. affix यत् applied to (a) राजन् श्वशुर, कुल, मनु in the sense of offspring, (b) शूल्, उखा, वायु, ऋतु and others, under certain conditions; confer, compare P. IV. 2.17, 31, 32, 101, (c) to अर्ध, परार्ध, words in the class headed by दि्श, छन्दस and others in specific senses; cf P. IV. 3-46, 54 et cetera, and others and (d) in specific senses to specific words mentioned here and there in a number of sUtras from IV.4, 75 to V.4.25; (e) to शाखा, मुख, जघन and others in the sense of इव (similar to) exempli gratia, for example शाख्यः, मुख्य:, et cetera, and others: confer, compare P. V. 3. 103; (7) case-ending य substituted for ङे of the dative sing; e. g. रामाय confer, compare P. VII. 3.102: (8) verb-affix यक् applied to the nouns कण्डू and others to make them ( denominative ) roots; e. g. कण्डूय,सन्तूय et cetera, and others confer, compare कण्ड्वादिभ्यो यक् P. III. 1.27 (9) | Vikarana य ( यक् ) applied to any root before the Saarvadhaatuka personal endings to form the base for the passive voice as also the base for the 'Karmakartari' voice e g क्रियते, भूयते, confer, compare सार्वधातुके यक् P. III. 1.67 (10) Unaadi affix य ( यक् ) applied to the root हृन् to form the Vedic word अघ्न्य: cf अघ्न्यादयश्च: ( 11 ) augment य ( यक् ) added to the affix क्त्वा in Vedic Literature: e. g. दत्त्वायः confer, compare क्त्वो यक् P. VII.1.47; (12) verb affix यङ् added to a root to form its Intensive base ( which sometimes is dropped ) and the root is doubledition e. g. चेक्रीयते,चर्करीति;. confer, compare P. III. 1.22,24; (13) short term ( प्रत्याहृार ) supposed to be beginning with य in the affix यइ in the sUtra धातेरेकाचो ... यङ् III. 1.22, and ending with ङ् in the sUtra लिड्याशिष्यङ्क III. 1.86, with a view to include the various verb affixes and conjugational signs.
yam(1)one of pair a twin letter available in pronunciation before a nasal letter and similar to it, when the nasal consonant is preceded by any one of the four consonants of the five classes; a transitional sound intervening between a non-nasal and the following nasal as a counterpart of the n6n-nasal: confer, compare वर्गेष्वाद्यानां चेतुर्णो पञ्चमे पर मध्ये यमो नाम पूर्वसदृशो वर्णः प्रातिशाख्ये प्रसिद्धः S.K. on P.व्व्III. l.1; (2) name given to the seven musical notes, found in the singing of Saaman; confer, compare मन्द्रमध्यमत्राख्येषु त्रिषु वाचः स्थानेषु प्रत्येकं सत स्थरभेदा भवन्ति कुष्टप्रथमद्वितीयतृतीयचतुर्थमन्द्रातित्वार्यः यमाः ' Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.XXIII. 13,14.
yāṭaugment या prefixed to the caseaffixes marked with the mute letter ङ् (i,e. the dative case singular. the ablative case. sing the genitive case singular. and the loc singular.) after a feminine base ending in आ; e. g. रमायै, रमाया:, रमायाम्: cf याडापः P.VII.3.113.
yukaugment य् (1) added to a verbbase or a root ending in अा before the affix चिण् and krt affixes marked with mute ञ् or णु: exempli gratia, for example अदायि, दायक: confer, compare आतो युक् चिण्कृतोः, P.VII.3.33; (2) added to the roots शा, ( शो ), छा ( छो ), सा ( सो ), ह्वा ( ह्वे ), व्या ( व्ये ) वा ( वै ) and पा ( पा and पे ) before the causal affix णिच् ; e. g. निशाययति पाययति et cetera, and others cf शाच्छासाह्वाव्यावेपां युक् P. VII.3.37; (3) added in Vedic Literature to the frequentative base of the root मृज् of which मर्मज्य is the form of perf Ist and 3rd person. singular. instead of ममार्ज: confer, compare दाधर्ति...ममृज्यागनीगन्तीति च P.VII.4.65.
yugapadadhikaraṇavacanatādenotation of two or more things by one single member by virtue of their being put together in a dvandva compound of two or more words; the grammarians advocate this doctrine stating that in a dvandva compound such as घटपटौ or घटपटम् , the word घट has the capacity of expressing the sense of both घट and पट, which in a sentence घटः पटश्च, it does not possess. Similarly पट also has the capacity of conveying the sense of both पट and घट. Possibly this theory is advocated by grarnmarians, on the analogy of words like पितरौ or मातरौ for मातापितरौ, द्यावा for द्यावापृथिवी and so on; confer, compare सिद्धं तु युगपदधिकरणवचने द्वन्द्ववचनात् P. II 2.29 Vart. 2. For details see Vyakaranamahabhasya on चार्थे द्वन्द्वः P. II. 2.29.
yogavibhāgadivision of a rule which has been traditionally given as one single rule, into two for explaining the formation of certain words, which otherwise are likely to be stamped as ungrammatical formations. The writer of the Varttikas and the author of the Mahabhasya have very frequently taken recourse to this method of योगविभाग; confer, compare P.I.1.3 Vart. 8, I.1.17 Vart.1,I.1.61, Vart. 3; I. 4.59 Vart. 1, II. 4. 2. Vart.2, III.1.67 Vart. 5, III.4.2. Vart. 6, VI.I. I Vart. 5, VI.1.33 Vart.1 et cetera, and others Although this Yogavibhaga is not a happy method of removing difficulties and has to be followed as a last recourse, the Varttikakara has suggested it very often, and sometimes a sutra which is divided by the Varttikakara into two,has been recognised as a couple of sutras in the Sutrapatha which has come down to us at present.
rañtaddhita affix. affix र causing vrddhi, applied to the word अग्नीध् in the sense of Sarana id est, that is a room or a place; exempli gratia, for example अाग्नीघ्रम् confer, compare अग्नीध: शरणे रञ् भं च P. IV.3.120 Vart, 9.
rāmānanda grammarian of the seventeenth century who wrote a commentary on Bopadeva's Mugdhabodha. He was possibly the same as Ramarama (see a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.) and Ramānandatirtha who wrote the Katantrasamgraha, although different from the well-known रामानन्दतर्थि of the sixteenth century who was a sanyasin and who wrote many philosophical and religious booklets.
ru(1)substitute र् for the consonant स् at the end of a word as also for the ष् of सजुत्र् , न् of अहन् and optionally with र् for the final स् of अम्नस्, ऊधस् and अवस् in Veda; exempli gratia, for example अग्निरत्र, वायुरत्र, सजूर्देवोभिः confer, compare P.VIII.2.66; the र् of this रु (as contrasted with the substitute र् which see a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.) is further changed into उ before a soft consonant and before the vowel अ provided it is preceded by the vowel अ, while र् , prescribed as substitute र (which see a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.), remains unchanged; e g. शिवोर्च्यः, शिवो वन्द्य: as contrasted with अहरत्र, अहर्गण:; (2) substitute र् for the final ज् of अवयज् (e. g, अवयाः), for ह् of श्वेतवह् (exempli gratia, for example श्वेतवाः), and for श् of पुरोडाश् (exempli gratia, for example पुगेडा:) before the case affix सु ; confer, compareP.VIII.4.67;(3)substitute र् (or द्) for the final स् or द् of a verb-form ending with the personal ending सिप् of the 2nd person. sing; confer, compare P. VIII.2.74,75;(4)substitute र् for the final न् of words ending with the affix मत् or वस् in Veda; exempli gratia, for example मरुत्व: हरिवः ; confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P.VIII.3.1; (5) substitute र् for the final न् at the end of a word when it is followed by a छव् letter id est, that is the first or a second consonant excepting ख् and फ्; exempli gratia, for example भवांश्चिनोति; confer, compare P.VIII. 3.7; (6) substitute र् for the final न् of नॄन् before the letter प् as also for the final न् of स्वतवान् and कान् under certain conditions; confer, compare P. VIII.3. 10.12.
rūpya(1)a taddhita affix. affix applied to a word meaning 'a cause' or expressing 'a human being' in the sense of 'proceeding therefrom' exempli gratia, for example समादागतं समरूप्यम्; देवदत्तरूप्यम् ; confer, compare हेतुमनुष्येभ्येन्यतरस्यां रूप्यः P. IV. 3.81 ; (2) a taddhita affix. affix applied to a word in the genitive case in the sense of भूतपूर्व, 'formerly belonging to' ; e. g. देवदत्तस्य भूतपूर्वो गौः देवदत्तरूप्य:; confer, compare Kāś. on षष्ठया रूप्य च P. V. 3.54.
lāghavabrevity of expression; expressing in as few words as possible; brevity of thought and conception. About brevity of expression,rules or sūtras of the ancient Sūtrakāras are noteworthy especially those of the grammarian Pāņini, whose brevity of expression is aptly extolled in the familiar expression अर्धमात्रालाघवेन पुत्रोत्सवं मन्यन्ते वैयाकरणा: Paribhāṣenduśekhara of Nāgeśa. Pari. 122; confer, compare also in contrast पर्यायशब्दानां लाघवगौरवचर्चा नाद्रियते Par.Śek.Pari.115.
loṭa term for the affixes of the imperative mood or आज्ञार्थ, applied to roots in the same sense in which the 'lin' affixes are applied; confer, compareविधिनिमन्त्रणामन्त्रणाधीष्टसंप्रश्र्नप्रार्थनेषु लिङ् । लोट् च P. III.3.161, 162. These affixes, specifically the affixes of the second person singular and plural,are also applied in the sense of frequency or collection,to a root when that root is repeated to show that frequency; exempli gratia, for example लुनीहि लुनीहि इति लुनाति;भ्राष्ट्रमट मठमट खदूरमट इति अटति; confer, compare Kāś on P. III. 4. 2,3.
varṇagrahaṇamention of a grammatical operation concerning a single letter or caused by a single letter; confer, compare न वर्णग्रहणेषु (एषा अर्थवत्परिभाषा प्रवर्तते). Siradeva Pari 10.
varṇavidhian injunction or operation conditioned by a single letter: लादेशो वर्णविधेर्भवत्यन्तरङ्गतः M.Bh. on P.1.4.2.
varṇāśrayaa grammatical operation depending upon a single letter id est, that is an operation caused by a letter singly; cf, वर्णाश्रये नास्ति प्रत्ययलक्षणम् |ParSek.Pari.21; confer, comparealso वर्णाश्रयः प्रत्ययो वर्णविचालस्यानिमित्तम् । दाक्षि:l M.Bh.onP. I.1.39 Vart.10.
varṇaukadeśaa part or a portion of a combined letter id est, that isसंयुक्तस्वर or संयुक्तव्यञ्जन. The diphthongs or संयुक्तस्वरs are divisible into two Svaras, for instance ऐ into अा and ए, औ into अा and ओ. Similarly double consonants like क्कू, च्च्, क्म्, क्त् et cetera, and others are also divisible. Regarding the point raised whether the individual parts can be looked upon as separate letters for undergoing or causing a grammatical operation,the decision of the grammarians is that they cannot be looked upon as separate, when they are completely mixed as the dipthongs; confer, compareनाक्यपवृक्तस्यावयवस्य तद्वधिर्यथा द्रव्येषु Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on Siva Sutra 3, 4 Vart. 6.
vākyaa sentence giving an idea in a single unit of expression consisting of the verb with its karakas or instruments and adverbs; confer, compareअाख्यातं साब्ययं सकारकं सकारकविशेषणं वाक्यसंज्ञं भवतीति वक्तव्यम् | साव्ययम् | उच्चैः पठति | सकारकम् | ओदनं पचति | Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. II. 1.1. Vart. 10. Regarding the different theoretical ways of the interpretation of a sentence see the word शाब्दबोध. For details, see वाक्यपदीय II. 2 where the different definitions of वाक्य are given and the अखण्डवाक्यस्फोट is established as the sense of a sentence.
vākyaparisamāpticompletion of the idea to be expressed in a sentence or in a group of sentences by the wording actually given, leaving nothing to be understood as contrasted with वाक्यापरिसमाप्ति used in the Mahabhasya: confer, compare वाक्यापरिसमाप्तेर्वा P.I.1.10 vart. 4 and the Mahabhasya thereon. There are two ways in which such a completion takes place,singly and collectively; cf प्रत्येकं वाक्यपरिसमाप्तिः: illustrated by the usual example देवदत्तयज्ञदत्तविष्णुमित्रा भोज्यन्ताम् where Patanjali remarks प्रत्येकं ( प्रत्यवयवं) भुजिः परिसमाप्यते; cf also समुदाये वाक्यपरिसमाप्तिः where Patajali remarks गर्गा: शतं दण्ड्यन्ताम् | अर्थिनश्च राजानो हिरण्येन भवन्ति न च प्रत्येकं दण्डयन्ति | Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ).on P.I.1.1Vart.12: cf also M.Bh. on P.I.1.7, I.2.39, II.2.l et cetera, and others वाक्यप्रकाश a work on the interpretation of sentences written with a commentary upon it by उदयधर्ममुनि of North Gujarat who lived in the seventeenth century A.D.
vākyasaṃskārapakṣathe grammarian's theory that as the individual words have practically no existence as far as the interpretation or the expression of sense is concerned, the sentence alone being capable of conveying the sense, the formation of individual words in a sentence' is explained by putting them in a sentence and knowing their mutual relationship. The word गाम् cannot be explained singly by showing the base गो and the case ending अम् unless it is seen in the sentence गाम् अानय; confer, compare यथा वाक्यसंस्कारपक्षे कृष्णादिसंबुद्धयन्त उपपदे ऋधेः क्तिनि कृते कृष्ण ऋध् ति इति स्थिते असिद्धत्वात्पूर्वमाद्गुणे कृते अचो रहाभ्यामिति द्वित्वं .. Pari. Bhaskara Pari. 99The view is put in alternation with the other view, viz. the पदसंस्कारपक्ष which has to be accepted in connection with the गौणमुख्यन्याय; cf पदस्यैव गौणार्थकत्वस्य ग्रहेण अस्य ( गौणमुख्यन्यायस्य) पदकार्यविषयत्वमेवोचितम् | अन्यथा वाक्यसंस्कारपक्षे तेषु तदनापत्तिः Par. Sek. on Pari. 15, The grammarians usually follow the वाक्यसंकारपक्ष.
vācikāexpressing directly, denoting: (feminine. of वाचक ): confer, compare तयेारभिसंबन्धस्य षष्ठी वाचिका भवति Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P.II. I.1 Vart. 4.
vidheyakavākyatāforming one single statement or idea with the prescriptive statement: union with the prescriptive rule so as to form one rule with it. The term is used in connection with प्रतिषेध or prohibitive assertions which have to be explained in combination with the prescriptive sentences or vidhivakyas; confer, compare निषेधवाक्यानामपि निषेध्यविशेषाकाङ्क्षत्वाद्विध्येकवाक्यतयैवान्वयः Par. Sek. on Pari. 2, 3.
vinivartakaliterally sending away: causing prohibition: confer, compare विशेषेण , निवर्तयतीति विनिवर्तकः । त्वयैवेति विनिवर्तकाधिकारकावधारकाः T.Pr. XXII.6.
vibhaktyarthanirṇayaa general term given to a chapter on case-affixes as also to treatises discussing the sense and relations of case-affixes. There is a treatise of this name written by Giridhara and another written by Jayakṛṣna Maunī.
viśeṣaspecific nature causing a difference; difference; specific feature; confer, compare सामान्यग्रहणे विशेषानतिदेश:(Paribhāṣā) confer, compare also यस्तु प्रयुङ्क्ते कुशलो विशेषे et cetera, and others Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). in Āhnika 1; confer, compare also क्रियावाचकमाख्यातमुपसर्गो विशेषकृत् Uvvaṭa's Bhāṣya on the Prātiśākhya works.on V.Pr.VIII.50.
vuk(1)augment वु added (a) to the word भ्रू after it, when the taddhita affix. affix ढक् ( एय ) in the sense of अपत्य is affixed to it; confer, compare भ्रुवो वुक् च P. IV.1.125; (b) to the root भू before an affix beginning with a vowel in the perfect and the aorist tenses; exempli gratia, for example बभूव, अभूवन् et cetera, and others: confer, compare P. VI.4.88: (c) to the root सू in the Perfect third person. singular.; exempli gratia, for example ससूव, P.VII.4.74; (2) taddhita affix. affix अक applied to the word कन्था as seen in use in the Bannu ( वर्णु ) district; e. g. कान्थकम् , confer, compare P.IV.2.103.
vuñ(ID taddhita affix. affix अक causing vṛddhi to the vowel of the first syllable of that word to which it is added, as prescribed, (a) to the words denoting an offspring as also to the words उक्ष, उष्ट्र et cetera, and othersin the sense of 'a group'; e. g. अोपगवकम् , औष्ट्रकम् , कैदारकम् et cetera, and others: confer, compare P.IV.2.39, 40; (b) to the words राजन्य and others in the sense of 'inhabited country' ; e. g. राजन्यकः देवनायकः et cetera, and others, confer, compare P. IV.2.53, (c) to the words headed by अरीहण such as द्वुघण, खदिर्, मैत्रायण, काशकृत्स्न et cetera, and others in the quadruple senses; exempli gratia, for example अारीहणकम् , द्रौबणकम् , confer, compare P.IV.2.80, (d) to the word धन्व meaning a desert, to words with य् or र for their penultimate, to words ending in प्रस्थ, पुर and वह as also to words headed by धूम, नगर, अरण्य कुरु, युगन्धर et cetera, and others, under certain conditions in the miscellaneous senses; e. g. सांकाश्यकः,पाटलिपुत्रकः, माकन्दकः, आङ्गकः, वाङ्गकः, धौमकः, नागरकः, अारण्यकः et cetera, and others; confer, compare P.IV.2.121-130,134,135, 136; (e) to the words शरद् , आश्वयुजी, ग्रीष्म, वसन्त, संवत्सर,अाग्रहायणी and others in the specific senses given: confer, compare P. IV. 3.27, 45, 46, 49, 50; (f) to words denoting descendence or spiritual relation, words meaning families and warrior clans, words कुलाल and others, words meaning clans, and students learning a specific Vedic branch in specific senses prescribed : e. g. आचार्यक, मातामहक, ग्लौचुकायनक, कालालक, काठक, कालापक et cetera, and others; confer, compare P. IV. 3.77, 99, 118, 126; (g) to the words शाकल, उष्ट्र, उमा and ऊर्णा in the specially given senses; exempli gratia, for example शाकलः, संघः, औप्ट्रकः, औमम् और्णम्, confer, compareP.IV.3.188,157,158; (h) to words with य् as the penultimate, and a long vowel preceding the last one, to words in the dvandva compound, and to the words मनोज्ञ, कल्याण and others in the sense of 'nature' or 'profession';e.g रामणीयकम् गौपालपशुपालिका, गार्गिका, काठिका etc; confer, compare P. V.1.132,133,134: (2) kṛt affix अक added to the roots निन्द् हिंस् and others, and to the roots देव् and कृश् with a prefix before,in the sense of a habituated,professional or skilled agent; exempli gratia, for example. निन्दकः, परिक्षेपकः, असूयकः, परिदेवकः, आक्रोशकः et cetera, and others confer, compare P.III.2. 146, 147.
vun(1)kṛt affix अक added to the roots प्रु, सृ, and लू in the sense of 'a skilled agent' and to any root in the sense of 'an agent who is blessed'; exempli gratia, for example प्रवकः, सरकः, लवकः, जीवकः ( meaning जीवतात् ) नन्दकः, ( meaning नन्दतात् ); confer, compare P. III. 1. 149, 150; (2) taddhita affix. affix अक added to(a) the words क्रम and others in the sense of 'a student of'; e.g, क्रमक:, पदकः शिक्षकः मीमांसकः; confer, compare P.IV.2.61; (b) the words पूर्वाह्न, अपराह्ण et cetera, and others as also the words पथिन् and अमावास्या in the sense of 'produced in': exempli gratia, for example पूर्वाह्नक,पन्थक, अमावास्यकः confer, compare P. IV.3. 28, 29, 30; (c) the words कलापि, अश्वत्य, यव and बुस in the sense of 'debt paid at the time of', the words वासुदेव and अर्जुन in the sense of 'devoted to',and the dvandva compounds when the words so formed mean either 'enmity' or 'nuptial ties';exempli gratia, for example कलापकम् (ऋणम्),यवकम् (ऋणम्) वासुदेवकः, अर्जुनकः, काकोलूकिका, कुत्सकुशिकिका; confer, compareP.IV.3.48, 98,125: (d) the words गोषद, इषेत्व et cetera, and others in the sense of 'containing' or 'possessing', and the word पथिन् in the sense of 'expert' exempli gratia, for example इषेत्वकः, पथक:; confer, compareP.V.2.62, 63; and (e) the words पाद and शत preceded by a numeral, in the sense of वीप्सा, as also in the senses of दण्ड (fine) and व्यवसर्ग when those words are preceded by a numeral; exempli gratia, for example द्विपदिकां ( ददाति ), द्विशतिकां ( ददाति ), द्विपदिकां दाडितः confer, compare Kāś. on P. V.4.l and 2.
vaiyākaraṇasarvasvaa small treatise on grammar written by a scholar of grammar named Kasinatha who has also written a few more small works वर्णविवेकचन्द्रिका, वृत्तिचन्द्रिका,धातुमञ्जरी etc
vaiyākaraṇasiddhāntakaimudīan extremely popular work on the subject of Sanskrit grammar written for the use of students, which, although difficult at a few places, enables the students by its careful study to get a command over the subject. and enable him to read other higher works on grammar. The work is based on the Astadhyayi of Panini without omitting a single Sutra. The arrangement of the Sutras is, entirely different, as the author, for the sake of facility in understanding, has divided the work into different topics and explained the Sutras required for the topic by bringing them together in the topic. The main topics or Prakaranas are twelve in number, viz. (1) संज्ञापरिभाषा, (2) पञ्चसंधि, (3) सुबन्त or षड्लिङ्ग, (4) स्त्रीप्रत्यय, (5) कारक, (6) समास, (7) तद्धित, (8) तिङन्त, (9) प्रक्रिया, (10) कृदन्त, (11) वैदिकी and (12) स्वर which are sometimes styled as व्याकरणद्वादशी. The work is generally known by the term सिद्धान्तकौमुदी, or even कौमुदी, and it has got a large number of scholarly and ordinary commentaries as also commentaries on commentaries, all numbering a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page. twelve, and two abridgments the Madhyakaumudi and the Laghukaumudi. The work was written by the reputed scholar Bhattoji Diksita of Varanasi in the seventeenth century. See Bhattoji Diksita.
vyantaddhita affix. affix य causing the acute accent for the first vowel of the word, added to the word भ्रातृ when the sense of the word so formed, is ’enemy'; see यत् a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.: confer, compare P.IV 1.145.
vyapavarga(1)division of a single thing into its constituent elements; confer, compare स्थानिवद्भावाद् व्यपवर्ग: Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on VII. 2.36, VII.3.44 Vart. 3; (2) distinct comprehension as possessed of a specific quality: cf न हि गौरित्युक्ते व्यपवर्गौ गम्यते शुक्ला नीला कपिला कपॊतेति। M.Bh, on P. I.2.64 Vart 37 ; (3) separation into parts, confer, compare कश्चिदेकेनैव प्रहारेण व्यपवर्गे करोति, M.Bh.on V.I.119 Vart 5; (4) distinct notion as a separate unit after the things have been combined confer, compare एकादेशे कृते व्यपवर्गाभावः संबुद्धिलोपो न प्राप्नोति Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. VI.1.69 Vart 3; confer, compare also Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on VII.1.80.
vyavadhāyakacausing an intervention; intervener which is required to be of a different kind; cf अतज्जातीयकं व्यवधायकं भवति Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. I. 1.7. Wart 8.
vyākhyāna(1)explanation of a rule, or a line, or a verse by analysing the rule and giving examples and counter-examples; confer, compare न केवलानि चर्चापदानि व्याख्यानं वृद्धिः आत् ऎजिति | किं तर्हि । उदाहरणं प्रत्युदाहरणं वाक्याध्याहारः इत्येतत्समुदितं व्याख्यानं भवति | M.Bh. Ahnika l Vart.11 ; (2)authoritative decision given in places of doubt by ancient scholars; confer, compare याख्थानतो विशेषप्रतिपत्ति: न हि संदेहादलक्षणम् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). Ahnika .1; Par.Sek.Pari.1.
vyāyataseparated; one out of the two | conjoined consonants separated by inserting a vowel in between; confer, compare व्यस्यन्त्यन्तर्महतोs व्यायतं तं दीर्घायु: सूर्यो रुशदीर्त ऊर्जम् Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XIV. 19, where Uvvata gives the explanation-दीर्घात्परं अव्यायतं अपृथग्भूतं रफेण सक्तमित्यर्थः एवंभूतं व्यस्यन्ति पृथक्कुर्वन्ति | यथा | दीरिघायु: ! सूरिय: | रुशदीरिते | ऊरजम्. Rk Samhita I. 85. 39, X. 158. 1, IX. 91.3 and IX. 63. 2. व्यावर्तन reversing the order of words and going back from a subsequent word to the previous one, as in the Krama,.Jata and other artificial recitals of Veda.
vyutpattivāda(l)name given to a topic in grammar which deals with the derivation of words as suitable to the sense: (2) name given to treatises discussing the derivation and interpretation of words.
śaktipotentiality of expressing the sense which is possessed by words permanently with them: denotative potentiality or denotation; this potentiality shows the senses,which are permanently possessed by the words, to the hearer and is described to be of one kind by ancient grammarian as contrasted with the two (अभिघा and लक्षणा) mentioned by the modern ones. It is described to be of two kinds-(a) स्मारिका शक्ति or recalling capacity which combines चैत्रत्व with पाक, and अनुभाविका शक्ति which is responsible for the actual meaning of a sentence. For details see Vakyapadiya III.
śabdārthavyākaraṇaexplanation of the sense of a word as arising from the word by stating the base, the affixes and the modifications to the base and the affixes.
śākaṭāyana(1)name of an ancient reputed scholar of Grammar and Pratisakhyas who is quoted by Panini. He is despisingly referred to by Patanjali as a traitor grammarian sympathizing with the Nairuktas or etymologists in holding the view that all substantives are derivable and can be derived from roots; cf तत्र नामान्याख्यातजानीति शाकटायनो नैरुक्तसमयश्च Nir.I.12: cf also नाम च धातुजमाह निरुक्ते व्याकरणे शकटस्य च तोकम् M. Bh on P.III.3.1. Sakatayana is believed to have been the author of the Unadisutrapatha as also of the RkTantra Pratisakhya of the Samaveda ; (2) name of a Jain grammarian named पाल्यकीर्ति शाकटायन who lived in the ninth century during the reign of the Rastrakuta king Amoghavarsa and wrote the Sabdanusana which is much similar to the Sutrapatha of Panini and introduced a new System of Grammar. His work named the Sabdanusasana consists of four chapters which are arranged in the form of topics, which are named सिद्धि. The grammar work is called शब्दानुशासन.
śānac(1)krt affix ( अान ) substituted for the Atmanepada लट् affixes, to which म् is prefixed if the base before the affix ends in अ; e. g. एधमान, विद्यमान, etc; cf P. III. 2. 124, 125, 126; (2) Vikarana affix ( अान ) substituted for श्ना before the personal ending हि of the imperative second person singular, if the preceding root ends in a consonant: e. g. पुषाण, मुषाण, confer, compare P. III. 1. 83.
śābdabodhaverbal interpretation; the term is generally used with reference to the verbal interpretation of a sentence as arising from that of the words which are all connected directly or indirectly with the verb-activity. It is defined as पदजन्यपदार्थोपस्थितिजन्यबोध:. According to the grammarians, verbal activity is the chief thing in a sentence and all the other words (excepting the one which expresses verbal activity) are subordinated to the verbal activity and hence are connected with it; confer, compare पदज्ञानं तु करणं द्वारे तत्र पदार्थधीः | शाब्दबोधः फलं तत्र शक्तिधीः सहकारिणी | मुक्तावली III.81.
śīrṣaṇyaprincipal; chief ; the word is used in connection with the utterance of Veda passages which are uttered loudly at the time of the third pressing ( तृतीयसवन ): confer, compare शिरसि तारम् T. Pr.XXIII.12; confer, compare शीर्षण्यः स्वरः M.Bh. on P. VI.l.61.
śravaṇahearing of a phonetic element or a word in the actual speech; audition; confer, compare तस्य चोदात्तस्वरितपरत्वे श्रवणं स्पष्टम् S. K. on P.I.2.32. In many technical grammatical terms, affixes and substitutes, there is sometimes a portion of them which is not a vital part of the word, but it is for the sake of causing certain prescribed grammatical operations. The letters or syllables which form such a portion are called इत् and they are only for the sake of grammatical operations (कार्यार्थ ), as contrasted with the other ones which are actually heard (श्रुत्यर्थ or श्रवणार्थ ).
ṣaṣṭhīnirdiṣṭaa word put in the genitive case; a substitute given as connected with a genitive case which replaces the whole word which is put in the genitive case unless the substitute consists of a single letter or is characterized by the mute letter ङ्, confer, compare षष्ठी स्थानेयोगा । अलोन्त्यस्य | अनेकाल्शित्सर्वेस्य et cetera, and others confer, compare P. I. 1.49 to 55.
ṣoḍaśakārikāan anonymous work consisting of only 16 stanzas discussing the denotation of words and that of the case-relations with a commentary by the author himselfeminine.
ṣdūlañtad, affix ल, causing Vrddhi to the initial vowel and the addition of the feminine. affix ई, applied to the word शमी in the sense of product or portion; शामीलं भस्म; confer, compare P. IV. 3.142.
saṃdhyaa diphthong: see below the word संधिः cf अत्थनामनी संध्यम् . संध्यक्षर diphthong, a vowel resulting from a combination of two vowels, but which is to be looked upon as one single vowel by reason of only a single effort being required for its pronunciation; the letters ए, ऐ, ओ and औ are termed as संध्यक्षर as contrasted with समानाक्षर, confer, compare अष्टौ समानाक्षराण्यादितस्ततश्चत्वारि संध्यक्षराण्युत्तराणि Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) I. 10; confer, compare also Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.II. 13, Ṛktantra Prātiśākhya. 111 ; confer, compare also संध्यक्षराणामिदुतौ ह्रस्वादेशे Kat. Pari. 43
saṃbuddhi(1)a term used in Panini's grammar for the case-affix of the vocative singular; confer, compare एकवचनं संबुद्धिः P. II. 3, 49; the vocative is, however, not looked upon as a separate case, but the designation संबोधन is given to the nominative case, having the sense of संबोधनः (2) the word is also used in the general sense of संबोधन i. e. addressing or calling: confer, compare एकश्रुति दूरात्संबुद्धौः किमिदं पारिभाषिक्याः संबुद्धेर्ग्रहणमेकवचनं संबुद्वि: (II. 3.49) आहोस्विदन्वर्थग्रहणं संबोधनं संबुद्वि: Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. I. 2.33.
saṃsargeliterally contact, connection; (1) contact of the air passing up through the gullet and striking the several places which produce the sound, which is of three kinds, hard, middling and soft; confer, compare संसर्गो वायुस्थानसंसर्गः अभिवातात्मकः स त्रिविधः । अयःपिण्डवद्दारुपिण्डवदूर्णापिण्डवदिति । तदुवतमापिशलशिक्षायाम् । स्पर्शयमवर्णकरो वायुः अय:पिण्डवत्स्थानमापीडयति | अन्तस्थावर्णकरो दांरुपिण्डवत् | ऊष्मस्थस्वरवर्णकर ऊर्णापिण्डवत् commentary on. T, Pr. XXIII. 1 ; ,(2) syntactical connection between words themselves which exists between pairs of words as between nouns and adjectives as also between verbs and the karakas, which is necessary for understanding the meaning of a sentence. Some Mimamsakas and Logicians hold that samsarga itself is the meaning of a sentence. The syntactical relation between two words is described to be of two kinds अभेद-संसर्ग of the type of आधाराधेयभाव and भेदसंसर्ग of the type of विषयविषयिभाव, समवाय, जन्यजनकभाव and the like.
saṃsṛṣṭawords syntactically connected with each other, and hence, capable of expressing the sense of a sentence; confer, compare संसृष्टो वाक्यार्थ: Vakyapadiya II. 2.
saṃspṛṣṭaliterally formed by combination or compact; the term is used in the PratiSakhyas for diphthongs which are combinations, in fact, of two vowels which are completely mixed being produced with a single effort. The diphthongs and ऋ also, are called संस्पृष्टवर्ण.
saṃsvāraa combination or collection of the Svaras or musical notes for purposes of singing the Sama hymns.
sanvadbhāvabehaviour like that of the affix सन् in point of its specific features, viz. causing reduplication in the case of the previous root.by the rule सन्यङोः VI.1.9, as also the substitution of इ for अ in the reduplicated syllable ( अभ्यास ), by P. VII. 4.79. This सन्वद्भाव is prescribed in the case of a root ending in इ ( णिच् ) before the aorist sign ( विकरण ) चङ्. confer, compare सन्वल्लघुनि चङ्परेनग्लोपे VII. 4.93.
samartha(1)having an identical sense; cf प्रोपाभ्या समर्थाभ्याम् । ...तौ चेत् प्रोपौ समर्थौ तुल्यार्थौ भवतः । क्व चानयोस्तुल्यार्थता । आदिकर्मणि । Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. I. 3. 42: (2) mutually connected in meaning in such a way that the meanings are connected together or commixed together; समर्थः शक्वः । विग्रहवाक्यार्थाभिधाने यः शक्तः स समर्थो वेदितव्यः । अथवा समर्थपदाश्रयत्वात्समर्थः । समर्थानां पदानां संबद्धार्थानां संसृष्टार्थानां विधिर्वेदितव्यः । Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. II. 1. I; confer, compare also एकार्थीभावो व्यपेक्षा वा सामर्थ्यम्;। (3) connected with relationship of senses, as between the activity and the subject,object, instrument et cetera, and others, or as between the master and the servant or the Possessor and the possessed; confer, compare राज्ञः पुरुषः or ग्रामं गच्छति,or सर्पिः पिब, but not सर्पिः पिब in the sentence तिष्ठतु सर्पिः पिब त्वमुदकम् । ; (4) capable of expressing the sense e. g. a word with the sandhis well observed; confer, compare समर्थानां प्रथमाद्वा । सामर्थ्ये परिनिष्ठितत्वम् । कृतसन्धिकार्यत्वमिति यावत् । S. K. on IV. I. 82; cf also समर्थः पटुः शक्तः इति पर्यायाः। शक्तत्वं च कार्योत्पादनयोम्यत्वम् et cetera, and others Balamanorama on the a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page..
samāsāntasecondary suffixes which are prescribed at the end of compounds in specific cases and which are looked upon as taddhita affixes; exempli gratia, for examplethe Samasanta डच् ( अ ), causing elision of the last syllable of the compound word, is added to compounds called संख्याबहुव्रीहि; exempli gratia, for example उपदशाः,पञ्चषाः et cetera, and others P.V.4.73. Samasanta अ is added to compounds ending with ऋच्,पुर्, अप्, and धुर,and अच् to words ending with सामन् , लोमन् , अक्षन् , चतुर् पुंस् , अनडुह्, मनस् , वर्चस्, तमस् , श्रेयस् , रहस्, उरस्, गो, तावत्, अध्वन् , etc :under specific conditions; cf P.V.4.68 to 86. अच् ( अ ) is added at the end of the tatpurusa compounds to the words अङ्गुलि, and रात्रि, under specific conditions; confer, compare P.V.4.86, 87: टच् ( अ ) is added at the end of tatpurusa compounds ending in राजन् , अहन् , सखि , गो, and उरस् and under specific conditions to those ending in तक्षन् , श्वन् , सक्थि, नौ, खारी, and अज्जलि as also to words ending in अस् and अन् in the neuter gender in Vedic Literature, and to the word ब्रह्मन् under specific conditions: confer, compare P.V. 4.91 to 105: टच् is added at the end of समाहारद्वन्द्व compounds ending in च् , छ् , ज्, झ्,ञ्, , द्, ष् and ह्, and at the end of अव्ययीभाव compounds ending with the words शरद् , विपाश् , अनस् , and मनस् et cetera, and others as also at the end of words ending in अन् or with any of the class consonants except nasals, confer, compare P.V.4.106-ll2; षच् ( अ ) is added to Bahuvrihi compounds ending with सक्थि and अक्षि as limbs of the body, as also with अङ्गुलि, while ष , अप् and अच् are added to specified words under special conditions; the Samasanta affix असिच् ( अस् ) is added at the end of a Bahuvrihi compound ending in प्रजा, and मेधा, the Samasanta affix इच् is added at the end of the peculiar Bahuvrihi compound formed of दण्ड, मुसल et cetera, and others when they are repeated and when they show a fight with the instruments of fight exchanged; confer, compare P. V.4.113128. Besides these affixes, a general समासान्त affix कप् is added necessarily or optionally as specified in P.V. 4.151-159.
samāhāracollection, collective notion which is one of the four senses of the indeclinable च. The collective notion by nature being single, the dvandva compound formed of words showing such a collection takes the neuter gender and singular number affixes confer, compareयदा तिरोहितावयवविवक्षा संहति: प्रधानं तदा समाहार: Siradeva Pari. 16: confer, compare also P. II.2.29 and II. 1. 51.
savarṇacognate, homophonic: a letter belonging to the same technical category of letters possessing an identical place of utterance and internal effort confer, compare तुल्यास्यप्रयत्नं सवर्णम् P. 1, 1. 9. For example, the eighteen varieties of अ, due to its short, long and protracted nature as also due to its accents and nasalization, are savarna to each other. The vowels ऋ and लृ are prescribed to be considered as Savarna although their place of utterance differs. The consonants in each class of consonants are savarna to one another, but by the utterance of one, another cannot be taken except when the vowel उ has been applied to the first. Thus कु stands for क्, ख्, ग्, घ् and ङ्. confer, compare तुल्यास्यप्रयत्नं सवर्णम् P. 1, I. 9 and अणुदित्सवर्णस्य चाप्रत्यय: P. I. 1. 69.
sāmyasimilarity, homogeneity: described to be of two kindsin words and in sense; confer, compare किं पुनः शब्दतः साम्ये संख्यातानुदेशो भवत्याहोस्विदर्थतः Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. I. 3. 10 Vart 3; confer, compare also स्थानकरणकालादिभि: तौल्यम् T. Pr XXIV. 5.
sārasvatabhāṣyaa critical gloss on the Sarasvata grammar by a grammarian named Kasinatha.
si( 1 )personal ending सिप् of the second. person. singular.; confer, compare तिप्तस्झिसिप्थस्थ. .महिङ् P.III.4.78; ( 2 ) Unadi affix क्सि ( सि ) confer, compare लुषिकुषिशुषिभ्य: क्सि: Un. III. 155.
siddhāntakaumudīvādārthaan explanatory work, discussing the difficult sentences and passages of the Siddhantakaumudi, written by a grammarian named Ramakrisna. सिद्धान्तरत्न a gloss on the Sarasvatisutra written by a grammarian natmed Jinacandra. सिद्धान्तरत्नाङ्कुर name of a commentary on the Katantraparisista by Sivaramacakravartin.
siddhāntasārasvataan independent work on grammar believed to have been written by Devanandin. सिद्धान्तिन् a term used in connection with the writer himself of a treatise when he gives a reply to the objections raised by himself or quoted from others,the term पूर्वपाक्षिन् being used for the objector. सिद्धि formation of a word: establishment of the correct view after the removal of the objection; e. g. संज्ञासिद्वि, कार्यसिाद्व, स्वरसिद्धि. सिप् (1) the personal ending ( सि ) of the second person singular (मध्यमपुरुषैकवचन ) substituted for the affix ल्; of the ten tenses and moods लट्, लिट्, लृट् and others; confer, compare P.III.4.78: (2 Vikarana affix स् added to a root before the affixes of लेट् or Vedic Subjunctive. सिम् a technical term used in the Vajasaneyi-Pratisakhya for the first eight vowels of the alphabet, viz. अ, आ, इ, ई, उ, ऊ, ऋ and ऋ: confer, compare सिमादितोष्टौ स्वराणाम् V. Pr.. I.44.
su(l)case affix ( सु ) of the nominative singular and ( सु ) of the locative plural; confer, compare P. IV. 1.2: (2) Unadi affix सु ( क्सु ) applied to the roots इष्: e.g, इक्षु: confer, compare इषः क्सुः Unadi 437. सुक् augment सुक् added according to some grammarians to any word optionally with असुक्, which is prescribed in the case of the words अश्व, वृष, क्षीर and लवण before the affix क्यच् ( य ) in the sense of desire. e. g. दधिस्यति, मधुस्यति et cetera, and others confer, compare P. VII. 1 51 Varttika.
sup(l)locative case affix सु: (2) short term for case-affixes, as formed by the syllable सु (the nominative case. singular. affix) at the beginning and the final consonant प् of सुप्, the locative plural case-affix in the rule स्वौजसमौट्...ङ्योस्सुप् P. IV. 1.2. These case afixes are called 'vibhakti' also. These सुप् affixes are elided after an indeclinable word; confer, compare अव्ययादाप्सुप: P. II. 4.82; in Veda स्, शे ( ए ), या, डा, ड्या, याच् and अाल् as seen, are substituted for these case affixes, which sometimes are even dropped or assimilated with the previous vowel of the base: e. g. सन्तु पन्थाः, आर्द्रे चर्मन् et cetera, and others cf, P. VII. 1.39. These caseaffixes are as a rule, grave-accented (अनुदात्त) excepting in such cases as are mentioned in P. VI.1. 166 to 184 and 19l.
sūtraa short pithy assertion laying down something in a scientific treatise; aphorism; the word is sometimes used in a collective sense in the singular, referring to the whole collection of Sutras or rules; confer, compare व्याकरणस्य सूत्रम् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on Ahnika I. The term is defined as अाल्पाक्षरमसंदिग्धं सारवद्विश्वतोमुखम् | अस्तोभमनवद्यं च सूत्रं सूत्रविदो विदुः. There are given generally six kinds of Sutras viz. संज्ञासूत्र, परिभाषासूत्र,विधिसूत्र, नियमसूत्र, प्रतिषेधसूत्र and अधिकारसूत्र; confer, compare also संज्ञा च परिभाषा च विधिर्नियम एव च प्रतिषेधोधिकारश्च षड्विधम् सूत्रलक्षणम् | Com. on Kat. I. 1.2.
sthānivadbhāvabehaviour of the substitute like the original in respect of holding the qualities of the original and causing grammatical operations by virtue of those qualities. By means of स्थानिवद्भाव,the substitute for a root is,for instance, looked upon as a root; similarly, a noun-base or an affix or so, is looked upon like the original and it can cause such operations or be a recipient of such operations as are due to its being a root or a noun or an affix or the like. This स्यानिवद्भाव cannot be, and is not made also, a universally applicable feature; and there are limitations or restrictions put upon it, the chief of them being अल्विधौ or in the matter of such operations as are caused by the 'property of being a single letter' (अल्विधौ). There are two views regarding this 'behaviour like the original' : (l) supposed behaviour which is only instrumental in causing operations or undergoing them which is called शास्त्रातिदेदा and (2) actual restoration to the form of the original under certain conditions only as prescribed which is called रूपातिदेश. The रूपातिदेश is actually resorted to by some grammarians in the case of the reduplication of roots; confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on द्विवेचनेचि P.I.1.59 and M.Bh. on P.I.1.59.See the word रूपातिदेश also. For details see Vol. VII p.p. 241243, Vyākarana Mahabhasya D.E. Society's Edition.
sthānedvirvacanapakṣaone of the two alternative views regarding reduplication according to which two wordings or units of the same form replace the original single wording, confer, compare स्थानेद्विर्वचनपक्षे स्थानिवद्भावात्प्रकृति व्यपदेशः: Siradeva Pari. 68.The other kind of reduplication is called द्वि:प्रयोगाद्विर्वचनपक्ष which looks upon reduplication as the mere placing of an exactly similar unit or wording after the original first unit. This alternative view is accepted in the Kasika: confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. VI.1.1.
sphoṭanirūpaṇaname of a work discussing the nature of Sphota written by Apadeva.
sphoṭavādaa general name given to treatises discussing the nature of Sphota written by the Vaiyakaranas who defend and establish the theory of Sphota and by the Naiyayikas who criticise the theory. Famous among these works are (l) स्फोटवाद by a stalwart Grammarian Kondabhatta, the author of the Vaiyakaramabhusana and (2) स्फोटवाद by NageSa, the reputed grammarian of the eighteenth century.
smātcase-ending स्मात् substituted for the ablative singular. case-affix ङसि placed after pronouns; confer, compare ङसिङयोः स्मात्स्मिनौ P. VII. 1. 15, 16.
smaicase ending स्मै, substituted for the dative singular.. case-affix ङे after pronouns; confer, compare सर्मनाम्न स्मै P. VII.1.14.
sya(1)case-ending स्य substituted for the genitive singular case-affix after bases ending in अ; confer, compare टाङसिङसामिनात्स्याः P. VII.1.12: (2) Vikarana affix स्य placed before the personal endings of लृट् and लृङ् (the second future tense and the conditional mood); cf स्यतासी लृलुटो: P. III.1.33.
syādaugment स्या affixed to a caseaffix marked with the mute ङ् id est, that is ङे, ङसि, ङस् and ङि of the dative case ablative case. genitive case and locative case singular after a pronoun and optionally after तृतीय and द्वितीय ending with the feminine. affix अा: confer, compare सर्वस्यै सर्वस्याः सर्वस्याम् द्वितीयस्यै, द्वितीयाय, तृतीयस्यै, तृतीयाय; confer, compare P. VII. 3.114, 115.
sva(1)personal-ending of the second person singular. Atmanepada in the imperative mood; cf थास: से | सवाभ्यां वामौ | P.III.4.80, 91 ; (2) a term used in the sense of स्ववर्गीय (belonging to the same class or category) in the Pratisakhya works; cf स्पर्श: स्वे R.T.25; confer, compare also कान्त् स्वे Ṛktantra Prātiśākhya. 1. 55;confer, comparealso R, Pr.IV.1 ; and VI.1 ;(3) cognate, the same as सवर्ण defined by Panini in तुल्यास्यप्रयत्नं सवर्णम् P. P.I.1.9; the term is found used in the Jain grammar works of Jainendra, Sakatayana and Hemacanda cf ]ain. I.1.2 SikI. 1.2; Hema. I.1.17.
svarapratirūpakaa word or Pratipadika which is exactly similar to a single vowel such as उ or अा or . ए and the like; such words are to be looked upon as Avyayas and the case-affixes after them are dropped when they are usedition confer, compare स्वरप्रतिरूपकमव्ययम्.
ha(1)representation of the consonant हू with अ added for facility of pronunciation; (2) a technical term for the internal effort between विवृत and संवृत, which causes घोष in the consonants; confer, compare संवृतविवृतयोर्मध्ये मध्यमप्रक्रारे यः शब्दः क्रियते स हकारसंज्ञो भवति। संज्ञायाः प्रयेाजनं ' हकारो हचतुर्थेषु ' इति ( तै. प्रा.श ९)Tribhasyaratna on T.Pr. II.6; (3) name of an external effort causing घोष: confer, compare सांप्रतिके प्रकृतिस्थे कण्ठे सति हृकारो नाम बाह्यः प्रयत्नः क्रियते | तेन च व्यञ्जनेषु घोषो जायते। Vaidikabharana on T.Pr. II.6; (4) name of a kind of external effort of the type of अनुप्रदान